Home

ET 200B manual - DCE FEL ČVUT v Praze

1. 00 0024 5 2 01 00241 dics 02 0024V 5A E OE 0 4 2 54 5 1 0 4 2 354 5 8 7 8 01 2 5 4 5 8 4 369 5 1 s 7 o bos T 92 d 5 B 6 i i po 5 15 a EIRIG ra T kspsprpepspepipa je Wz bo poor psp ei Ms z Figure 7 32 Front Elevation ET 200B 32DO 6ES7 132 0BL01 0XB0 200B Distributed Station 7 38 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B 32DO and TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET 200B 32DO iV PROFIBUS DP 5V 4V gt Logic g
2. ing ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO 235 51 5 C RUN It Oe 1 3 d co H H M i n Ip 5 1 ss Je Jn Ye bo o e Nee se ss zn Jer e Figure 7 22 Dimensional Drawing ET 200B 32DI 6 57 131 0BL00 0XBO and ET 200B 32DI 0 215 6 57 131 0BL10 0XBO Terminal Number Figure 7 23 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the ing ET 200B 32DI 10 0624V L 11 00241 12 0024V L 13 0624V 35122 ob 4 254 0 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3456 7 lo 13 de ds de l7 19 ho In hs 16 by ha ho ko ki k2 6 bs 5126 l7 128 lag 150 31 3 5 65 96 Figure 7 23 Connection Diagram ET 200 32 1 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO and ET 200B 32DI 0 2 6 57 131 0BL10 0XBO ET 200B Distributed Station 7 20 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B 32DI or ET 200B 32DI 0 2 ms and
3. ing block with electronics block inserted and a variety of bus connectors p 62 _ _ 62 _ 60 860 Al 1 F 0000 OOOO 2 0000 OOOO 0000 o000 Dada LILILILI OOOO 0000 o000 0000 0000 Dada OOOO OOOO 0000 o000 p see YW a000 g M 2000 421 m B 6ES7 972 0BA10 0XBO 8 6ES7 972 0 10 0 0 SIEMENS H SIEMENS 1 MES Y nr a 5 c d 1 5 8 I 61 8 4 Figure 7 17 Dimensional Drawing Side Elevation with Bus Connector 6ES7 972 0BA10 0XA0 and 6ES7 972 0BB10 0XA0 ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 13 Digital Modules 7 3 Electronics Blocks Introduction This section contains the technical data of the electronics blocks of ET 200B The technical data for each electronics block is accompanied by anoutline of the characteristics the block diagram and the pin assignments for the various permissible terminal blocks In this Section In Section you will find on Page ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO and ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0 01 0 0 ET 200B 32DO 6ES7 13
4. Figure 7 4 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB1 4 DC Screw Type Terminal 4 Tier ET 200B Distributed Station 7 6 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules 7 2 3 Terminal Block TB3 DC 6ES7 193 0CA30 0XA0 Dimensional Draw Figure 7 5 is a dimensional drawing of the TB3 DC spring latch terminal ing BAN RN EE RENE AR REN un ARANA AAAAAA 2222 om fe EU EL 160 Holes for Attachment 25 5 25 5 121 7 SIEMENS 1 57 83 0 30 0 80 Em 000000 1 75 iziIBISUIBISmmumMII aeu 33134135 35 37138 39 40 i 42 43144145 467 Mi M2 M3 H3 X 193 0 30 0 0 TB3 DC Figure 7 5 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB3 DC Spring Latch Terminal Terminal Number Figure 7 6 is an enlargement of the terminal numb
5. Current Output V V V A AC AA AA TB8 1 Dp gt lt lt gt x3 1 2 4 y y y 0 0 41 1 3 1 4 K 10 1102 1 11 2 Mi 4 Shield gt A 4 24V RL RL Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC a Mexternal Figure 8 27 2 Wire Connection of Loads for Current Output ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 81 Analog Modules 8 6 2 Configuration Options Type File The information in this section applies to the type file SI8018BE 200 The type file contains the possible configurations The configuration you choose depends on the wiring of the module Configuration Table 8 56 shows the possible configurations of the ET 200B 4AO with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 Table 8 56 lists only the slots for configuring the output areas slots 4 to 7 Slots 1 to 3 have the default value 004 Table 8 56 Possible Configurations for the Output Areas of ET 200B 4AO Config Terminals used Length Meaning uration Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 in words 0 1 0 3 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 0 3 3 0 2 0 4 12 14 2 2 2 4 3 1 34 4 start address is as signed for the entire module addresses for 4 are reserved 2 module addres
6. 19 35 196 3 zi H H N S STEMENS e 1p 57 193 02 10 0 80 n pe TE i LEER L 5 000000 FI 17 5 N oo T RUN STOP D 2 D m oodoocdoodoodecocd S Y c Se ES BE f Q ooooooodoooooooo Goooodoodaccodocoe i ooooooooooooooooKS eeseeseeseeseososeo 1 pi S D ILJLLEETEHEGE TON TE T T 9 8 4 74 6 117 05 15 125 05 Figure 7 7 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB2 DC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier Terminal Number Figure 7 8 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the ing TB2 DC screw type terminal 3 tier 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 12713 MIS 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25126 27 28 23 30 31 32 33 34 35136 37 38139 40 41142 43 44145 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 L5 L54 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89190 91 92 93 94 95 96 5 MS Figure 7 8 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB2 DC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier ET 200B Distributed Station 7 8 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules
7. RUN BF SIEMENS 200B 1680 Do oO Oo L4 L4 L15 2 Os Oe Oe Oe L3 6 L7 Oa O7 RE ay 1207230 pe ay 1207230 sig 4 BORELAY 24 150V 7 pe 24 150V D dB 8 4 5 ub 7 D ub ub 7 E L1 ODEO hhh DI RU BBO RE RATS 5 la 1 fe 4 5 6 7 10 je t4 fis 16 17 ia 9 eo Je1 ee 23 Jee 27 jes 30 31 32 N g 33 39 42 48 49 55 58 64 Figure 7 54 Front Elevation ET 200B 16RO AC 6ES7 132 0 00 0 0 ET 200B Distributed Station 7 84 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 16RO AC and TB6 DC ET 200B 16RO AC Galvanic PROFIBUS DP isolation 120 Logic e g i 5y W 120 t 30 V 24V 4 16x 1 Poe AN 24V M24 AB Li Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB6 AC SVM Station um number logic fuse selection Conn Contact 1972 Le N PROFI o oo ojo BUS DP
8. 19 35 196 3 _ _ N SIEMENS mmc reme 1P 6 57 193 0 10 0 0 es 2 id 0009000 FEES n eoooeoooeoloooolo eeoeoeecloooocoococ 3 ccc s oS ge i eo ooooooodooooo o o 0222422224202042002 sz oooooooooooooooo ceoececoooeeceeoeepo n 9 8 4 74 6 Sd 117 05 16 45 3 125 05 Figure 7 15 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB6 AC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier Terminal Number Figure 7 16 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the ing TB6 AC screw type terminal 3 tier 1 2 3 4 56 78 9 01 12 13 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25126 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38139 40 41142 43 44145 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 6 62 63 6411 L1 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73174 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89190 91 32 93 94 95 96 N Figure 7 16 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB6 AC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier ET 200B Distributed Station 7 12 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules 7 2 9 Terminal Block and Bus Connector Dimensional Draw Figure 7 17 shows the dimensional drawings side elevation of any terminal
9. 16 3 D RUN 1 o re qe ET 200B 1601 ec 10 1 iD co 0 4 2 4 1 5 1 5 5 2 B 2 6 3 3 3 7 1 Y 10 DC24V 11200241 2 424 45048 70 423 4587 h de ds de ds de dz de do ho In di tis I his he ws 33 48 PS a ER T 224 Figure 7 18 Dimensional Drawing ET 200B 16DI 6 57 131 0BH00 0XBO Terminal Number ing Figure 7 19 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the ET 200B 16DI 10 0024V 11 0 24 2 5 4 5 6 7 0 41 2 3 4 56 7 la Is 16 9 ho du hz hs dhs he 33 48 Y Y Y i M ys y y js k Tus Figure 7 19 Connection Diagram ET 200B 16DI 6ES7 131 0BH00 0XBO ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 15 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B 16DI and TB1 DC or TB3 DC 200B 16DI iV PROFIBUS DP 5 4V e Logic 4 d 5V 16x 10 0 7 11 0 7 L3 L34 M X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB1 DC or Station TB3 DC number Suppr logic selection
10. RUN BF SIEMENS ET 200B 1600 ao 01 L4 Oo L4 on Os Oa Os Oe Oe Oe Oe L13 O7 Cis L17 90 120 230 05 Q1AC120 230V 05 45 8 9123 4567 0123 45 67 0 2 1 le 1L1 33 39 2142 48 5 he hz Jeo 3149 55 4L1 58 64 B 30 Jai t EIL r1 0 d r1 2 65 66 67 68 1N 69 71 2 74 76 7 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 3N 85 87 4N 90 92 93 94 95 96 N a Figure 7 52 Front Elevation ET 200B 16DO AC 6 57 132 0 00 0 0 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 79 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 16DO AC and TB6 AC ET 200B 16DO AC 120 30 Galvanic 24 VN PROFIBUS DP isolation 120 30 Logic 1 4 __ 5v Y pp EM m ueque e TO DIIS 24V QO QO Q1 Q1 M24 0 3 1111 4 7 211 0 3 13 1 14 7 411 L1 N x1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB6 AC 5 Sta
11. 5 X 3 X 1 X2 X 4 X3 XA X2 X4 3 amp 1 D or 2 Te iss guroi _ Figure 8 24 Front Elevation ET 200 4 6ES7 135 0 01 0 0 8 76 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules List of Subsec The following aspects of the ET 200 4 are described below tions In Section you will find on Page 8 6 2 Configuration options 8 6 3 Setting the operating mode 8 6 4 Analog value representation operation with SIMATIC S5 8 6 5 Analog value representation operation with SIMATIC S7 8 87 8 6 6 Block diagram pin assignment and technical data 8 89 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 77 Analog Modules 8 6 1 Connecting Loads Possible Connec There are two methods of connecting loads to the ET 200B 4AO tions e 4 wire connection of loads e 2 wire connection of loads On the Following The following pages contain a connection example for every connection pos Pages sibility Please note the following rules Rules Please note the following rules when connecting loads to the ET 200B 4AO The output terminals x 2 x 0 to 3 have a fixed connection to analog ground MA If non floating loads are connected to a common reference potential please ensure minimum potential differences Failure to do so can lea
12. 7 36 Block Diagram ET 200B 8RO and TB1 DC or 7 37 Block Diagram ET 200B 8RO and 1 4 7 38 Front Elevation ET 200B 8DI 8DO 7 39 Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8DO and TB1 DC or TB3 DC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4 812 6089 02c IX Contents 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8DO and TB1 4 DC Front Elevation ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA and TB1 DC or TB3 DC Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA and TB1 4 DC Front Elevation ET 2008 1601 16 00 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI 16DO and TB2 DC TB4 DC Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI 16DO and TB2 4 DC Front Elevation ET 200B 24DI 8DO and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms Block Diagram ET 200B 24DI 8DO or ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms TB2 DC or 7 69 Block Diagram ET 200B 24DI 8DO or ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms and TB2 4 DG siste e tnter br re er etm eur Pase tute C de Front Elevation ET 200B 16DI AC Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI AC and TB6 AC Front Elevation ET 200B 16DO AC Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO AC and TB6 A
13. D 4 Setting the Operating Mode with COM ET 200 V4 x E Analog Modules and Old Type Files E 1 Status and Error Indication by LEDs E 2 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics Analog ET 200B E 3 Configuration Options E A Parameters for Analog F Order Numbers 1 Order Numbers for ET 200B Components F2 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS DP Accessories ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4 812 6089 02c vii Contents Figures 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 4 3 15 3 16 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 7 1 7 2 7 3 viii Typical PROFIBUS DP Configuration with SIMATIC S5 S7 M7 Components of ET 200B The TB4 DG The TBE scelerum Du Sra ees 200B 16DI Electronics Block Clearances Required for Installation of the 1601 16DO 8DI 8DO 8DI 8DO HWA 8RO and 4 8Al 4 4AO Electronics Blocks without Shield Connecting Element 3 2 Clearances Required for Installation of the 16DI AC 16DO AC 3201 16DO 2A 32DO 16DI 16DO 24DI
14. sing 4x1AO x 4 separate start ad 3x1AO E 5 y 5 3 dress can be assigned for each channel 2x 1AO x x 2 single channel ad desai 1 1 x o 1 Length of user data X Connection of load o Connection of sensor lines for voltage measurement Diagnostics Diagnostics messages and diagnostics data slave diagnostics are returned only for the configured channels 200B Distributed Station 8 82 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 6 3 Setting the Operating Mode Setting the Operat ing Mode Coding Plugs Channel You set the operating mode of the ET 200B 4A0 electronics block by means of the coding plugs on the 8 terminal block and by means of the COM 200 or STEP7 parameterization software The coding plugs of the 8 enable you to set the output circuit for analog value output of each individual channel of the ET 200 4 The possible settings of the coding plugs are A B C and D For details of the relationships between the settings of the coding plugs and the output mode or load see Section 8 6 1 Sectio 3 1 describes how to change the settings of the coding plugs Some parameters of the ET 200B 4A0 listed on the following pages apply only to individual channels Table 8 57 lists the assignment of TB8 terminals to channels Table 8 57 Assignment of Terminals to Channels Channel Terminals Channel 0 Terminals
15. 1 2 x4 L x1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block Analog TB8 g Station number selection Suppr logic Coding panels STOP RUN switch Connection 10 50 41 1 3014 12 12 41 33134 L K 0 0 2 1 1112 2 112 2 3 13 22 M 2 Channel Channel Channel Channel Analog 24 V 0 1 2 3 ground supply Figure 8 23 Block Diagram ET 200B 4AI 6ES7 134 0HF10 0XBO and TB8 ET 200B Distributed Station 8 72 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Terminal Assign The table below contains the terminal assignments of the TB8 for ment 200B 4AI Table 8 55 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Taninin ILE HE HB bering 8 ojo D 0o ie ER EN EHE uu Terminal K K Unassigned 1 Measuring line x Measuring line x3 Unassigned 4 Connection resistance meas
16. Structure of the Header Device Related Diagnostics for Digital 200 6 2 ce rore e s id e derat 5 14 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics for Digital 200B Byte 7 iei berg e GE E ged 5 14 Structure of the Header ID related Diagnostics for Analog ET200B Byte 6 ues senda whee qu nhau pep Pes 5 16 Structure of ID related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 7 8 15 16 Structure of ID related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 7 8 in the Event of an Error in the Configuration Telegram 5 17 Structure of the Header Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET200B Byte 9 5 18 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 10 t 28 dedu d ted uen eed ne eda 5 19 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB1 DC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier 7 5 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB1 DC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier 7 5 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB1 4 DC Screw Type Terminal 4 Tier 7 6 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Contents 7 4 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB1 4 DC Screw Type Terminal 4 Tier 7
17. Figure 7 10 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB2 4 DC Screw Type Terminal 4 Tier ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 9 Digital Modules 7 2 06 Terminal Block TB4 DC 6ES7 193 0CB30 0XA0 Dimensional Draw Figure 7 11 is a dimensional drawing of the TB4 DC spring latch terminal ing 2529 25 5 19 4 196 3 I HH N N STEMENS 57 193 0 30 0 80 110 LH INI Free oe 000000 FI 17 5 nu c RUN STOP 5 STEEL Tigisimiaiisiaisiciieiatatel s
18. ET 200B 41 e ra ra A R D B X3 X1 X 2 X 4 Ma X 3 X 1 X 2 X 4 X 3 X 1 X 2 X 4 Na 5 RP 5 9 RAP du x 2 e e 1 4 0 01 0 Figure 8 16 Front Elevation ET 200B 4AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 51 Analog Modules List of Subsec The following aspects of the ET 200B 4AI are described below tions In Section you will find on Page 8 5 1 Connecting transducers Configuration options Setting the operating mode Analog value representation operation with SIMATIC 55 8 5 5 Analog value representation operation with SIMATIC S7 8 70 8 5 6 Schematic circuit diagram terminal assignment and techni 8 72 cal data 200B Distributed Station 8 52 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 5 1 Connecting Transducers Possible Connec You can connect the following to the ET 200B 4AI Hong e Up to 4 voltage sensors 2 wire connection Upto 4 current sensors 2 wire connection Mixed configurations with different types of sensor are possible 2 wire measuring transducer
19. 8 6 1 Connecting 05 8 6 2 Configuration Options 8 6 3 Setting the Operating Mode 8 6 4 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S5 8 6 5 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S7 8 6 6 Block Diagram Terminal Assignment and Technical Data A Type Files and GSD Files A 1 Type Files of the ET 200B A 2 GSD Files of the ET 200B Modules B Configuration Telegram C Parameterization Telegram C 1 Structure of the Parameterization C 2 Standard Part of the Parameterization Telegram Parameters for Status C 4 Parameters for Analog Input Modules C 5 Parameters for Analog Output Module D Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x D 1 Status and Error Indication by LEDs D 2 Slave Diagnostics D 2 1 General Information on Slave Diagnostics Operation with IM 308 B D 2 2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics D 2 3 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics Analog ET 200B D 3 Configuration Options
20. Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern 6 57 134 OKHO1 OXBO Description of the Bits GES7 134 0 01 0 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI Measuring Ranges 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV and 1000 mV Complement of 5 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the 200B 4 8AI Measuring Ranges 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV and 1000 mV Amount and Sign Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8Al for Resistance Measurement Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the 200B 4 8Al for Resistance Thermometers Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200 4 8 for Ni 100 Resistance Sensors Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8Al with Linearization Type E Thermocouples Nickel Chrome Copper Nickel to IEC 548 Part 1 Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the 200B 4 8Al with Linearization Type J Thermocouple Iron Copper Nickel Constantan to IEC 584 Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type K Thermocouples Nickel C
21. 1 2 1 2 What is the 200B 1 2 1 Terminal 1 2 2 Electronics BIOCK ie zoo luin ERE edes eee nce 2 Technical Description 2 1 Design of the Terminal Block 2 2 2 2 Design of the Electronics Block 2 4 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation 3 1 Installing and Setting the Terminal Block 3 2 3 2 Installing the Electronics 3 12 3 3 Dismantling the Terminal Block and the Electronics Block 3 14 3 4 Electrical Installation liliis 3 16 3 4 1 Grounded Configuration 3 17 3 4 2 Ungrounded Configuration 3 20 3 5 Wiring the Terminal Block 3 22 3 6 Wiring the Bus Interface 3 26 4 Configuration and Parameterization 4 1 Configuration Options 4 2 4 2 Requirements for Configuration 4 3 4 3 Where to Find the Requisite Information 4 5 5 Status and Error Diagnostics 5 1 Possible Response on Startup 5 2 5 2 Status and Error Indication by LED
22. 7 L6 elo w 92 Voltage supply 3N for channel Q1 0 to 3 5 oo 26 not used 58 Voltage supply 41 1 for channel 90 Voltage supply 4N for channel QI 4 to 7 QI 4 to 7 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 81 Digital Modules Table 7 15 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16DO AC 6ES7 132 0HF00 0XBO continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 not used Voltage supply 41 1 for channel Voltage supply 4N for channel QI 4 to 7 QI 4 to 7 not used Q1 Output 4 Q1 Output 5 Q1 Output 6 Q1 Output 7 96 L1 Voltage supply internal logic N Voltage supply internal logic L1 Voltage supply internal logic N Voltage supply internal logic Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 16DO AC e Ifinstalled in an AC 230 V system the following must always be con nected to the same outer conductor same phase and 2L1 2N same phase 3L1 3N and 4L1 4N same phase ET 200B Distributed Station 7 82 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dim
23. 2 voltage sensors and two Pt 100 thermal resistors 4 X IAI 1 Length of user data X Connection of measuring lines o Connection of constant current lines Notes on Configur Bear the following in mind when configuring the modules A 5 s 9 Ifyou connect resistance thermometers resistors the assignment defined in the configuration and the parameterization must match Ifyou connect 4 resistance thermometers resistors the only possible con figuration options SALor 4 X IAI If you use single channel addressing and configure more channels than is possible for parameterization with resistance thermometers resistors an error message is displayed for the module Ifyou connect resistance thermometers resistors and configure with the SAI ID the channels not used by the resistance inputs you configure channels 1 3 5 and 7 are also transmitted to the DP master In the input area addresses that cannot be used for these channels are assigned e Ifyou connect resistance thermometers resistors and use single channel addressing addresses are assigned only for the resistance inputs Diagnostics messages and diagnostics data slave diagnostics are re turned only for the configured channels ET 200B Distributed I O Station 8 22 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 4 3 Setting the Operating Mode Setting the Operat ing Mode Coding Plugs Channel Group You set the
24. Chap 6 8 Which type files do I need Appendix A How are configuration and Appendix BC parameterization telegrams structured This manual describes all the ET 200B modules which can be accessed with the PROFIBUS DP bus protocol These ET 200B modules all have order numbers starting with 6ES7 see Section F 1 This manual is valid for operation of the ET 200B with IM 308 B master interface module and COM ET 200 V4 x M 308 C master interface module and COM ET 200 WINDOWS e S7 M7 DP master with PROFIBUS DP interface and STEP 7 other PROFIBUS DP masters from Siemens and other vendors You can also order the documentation for the ET 200B distributed I O station as an electronic manual on CD ROM In addition to this manual you will also need the manual for the DP master used see Appendix F 2 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Preface Organizational Conventions Standards Courses Queries The following organizational conventions are used in this manual to make it easier for you to find specific information e At the front of the manual is a complete table of contents together with a list of all the figures and tables contained in the manual The left hand column of each page in the individual chapters has head ings to help you find information more quickly The Appendix is followed by a glossary containing definitions of the most important techni
25. Drive Drives Drivef Driver dz ep 4 zu 1 p 1 poe a iu uU Ju _ 8 8 _ 8 3 9 00 Q1 Q2 Q3 L1 M1 0 7 L22 M2 0 7 L3 M3 0 7 4 0 7 5 X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 4 DC Station number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN Connbelion Suppr Suppr Suppr Suppr switch PROFIBUS DP logic logic logic logic L14M1 L2 4M2 L34M3 14 4 15 5 5 Out fo 2 Supply o o L e o 9 s e gt NA e D 0 G e e 1 Screw for ground Digital 24 V ing see Sec 3 4 outputs supply Figure 7 34 Block Diagram ET 200B 32DO 6ES7 132 0BL01 0XBO and TB2 4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station 7 40 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 32D9O For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB2 4 DC by way of example Table 7 7 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and for ET 200B 32DO 6ES7 132 0BL01 0XBO Terminal numbering TB2 4 DC 1213 1415 6 7189 1001 12 3 M I5 16 17 18 19 21 21 22 23124 25 26 27 2812931 30 31 32 33 34 35 136 37 38 1321401 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 150151152 153 54 55 96 57 98 59 60 61 62 83 64 Lo L5 65 66 67 68
26. 6 Header ID related diagnostics Byte 7 ID related diagnostics Byte 8 Byte 9 Header device related diagnostics Bytes 9 to 28 Device related diagnostics Figure 5 2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Requesting Slave You can request slave diagnostics with the following function blocks Diagnostics Table 5 3 Function Blocks for Slave Diagnostics SIMATIC S5 with IM 308 C FB 192 FB IM308C SIMATIC 57 7 SFC 13 SFC DG 200B Distributed Station 5 10 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 4 Structure of Station Status 1 to 3 Introduction Station status 1 3 provides an overview of the status of the ET 200B see Figures 5 1 and 5 2 bytes 0 to 2 Station Status 1 The table below shows the structure of station status 1 Byte 0 Table 5 4 Structure of Station Status 1 Byte 0 Bit Meaning 0 1 1 DP slave not yet ready for data exchange 2 1 Configuration data sent by DP master to DP slave does not match the structure of the DP slave 3 Device related diagnostics data is waiting 4 Requested function is not supported by DP slave 3 Implausible answer received from DP slave 6 parameterization telegram is errored 7 slave was parameterized by a DP master not the DP master which currently has access to the DP slave Station Status 2 The table below shows the structure of station status 2 B
27. enhance noise immunity in the case of ground ref erenced measurement The following pages contain a connection example for every connection pos sibility and measuring principle Please note the following rules Please note the following rules when connecting measured value sensors to the ET 200B 4AI The permissible potential difference at the differential input 1 lt gt 2 0 to 3 must not exceed 10 V The maximum permissible common mode voltage V cw between the differential inputs 1 lt gt 2 0 to 3 and analog ground MA is 1 V The maximum permissible isolation voltage between analog ground MA PE A or between the reference potential of the supply voltage M is 75 V DC 60 V AC e You must short circuit the connection terminals of unused voltage inputs and connect them to Ma coding plug at position D for voltage sensors position implements the connection to for current sensors e You must short circuit terminals K and For this purpose set the coding plug to the C position Note Please note the explanation of shielding of analog lines in Sections 3 1 and 3 5 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Connecting Volt age Sensors Floating Ground Measurement x3x l x2x4 Ma Voltage sensors for the following measured value ranges can be connected 1 25 V 2
28. DIA Lit L2 SI EMENS ET 200B 1600 Q0 01 00 DC24V 0 5 2 01 0 24 0 5 2 0124345 6 7 0 41 2 3 4 5 6 7 uit s Je Js le 7 s p o n o 3 js s 1 14 L3 r3 X e 55 4 55 6 97 38 39 0 41 42 45 45 46 az 48 M3 132 08H01 0XBO Figure 7 26 Front Elevation ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0 01 0 0 7 26 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B 16DO and or TB3 DC ET 200B 16DO TB1 DC or TB3 DC PROFIBUS DP 4V 5V 4V 5 Supply L1 L24L34 M Interface between electronics block and terminal block Station number selection Connection P
29. ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics Configuration Er If a configuration telegram contains an error only the 3 byte ID related diag ror nostics bytes 6 7 8 is returned and no device related diagnostics If the configuration telegram contains an error the structure of ID related diagnostics is as follows 76543 O Bit No Byte 7 0100 Possible IDs Slot 4 defective 8Al 4Al 4AO 1Al Slot 5 defective 1Al Slot 6 defective 1Al 1AO Slot 7 defective 1Al 1AO Slot 8 defective 1Al 7 2 10 BitNo Byte 8 0 0 0 0 0 Message Possible IDs Slot 9 defective 1Al Slot 10 defective 1Al Slot 11 defective 1Al Figure 5 7 Structure of ID related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 7 8 in the Event of an Error in the Configuration Telegram Note If there is an error in the configuration telegram the configured slots of the analog ET 200B module the configurations of which are errored are shown If the error in the configuration telegram is general e g wrong length the value FFy is returned for bytes 7 and 8 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 17 Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 8 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics Analog ET 200B Introduction Header Byte 9 5 18 The device related diagnostics fo
30. Suppr logic i STOP RUN Coding panels Swit Connection k 11031041 1 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 B3 3 4 PROFIBUS DP K 01021141121 2 1 2 2 03 113 2 MAM VA Compen Chnl gp 0 Chnl gp 1 Chnl gp 2 Chnl gp 3 N sating 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 Analog 24V box 0 3 0 4 1 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 3 3 3 4 ground supply Figure 8 15 Block Diagram ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0KHO01 0XBO and TB8 ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 47 Analog Modules Terminal Assign The table below contains the terminal assignments of the TB8 for ment ET 200B 4 8AI depending on the sensor connected Table 8 37 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200B 4 8AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 P j 5 i 3 1 3 5 1 5 5 5 i TR m Terminal num di bering TB8 Dni a1 Diu Di DIBI Assignment When the Following are Connected Thermocouple Resistance Thermome Voltage Sensor ter 2 Measuring line Constant current line Ic Measuring line x Measuring
31. 0 02 0 05 96 0 05 i 0 05 96 Yes max 1 output simul taneously Max 25 mA Max 18 V Max 100 m 328 ft In operation with the IM 308 B the maximum possible baud rate is 1500 kbaud 8 91 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Type Files and GSD Files In this Chapter In order to operate an ET 200B module you require atype file for operation with COM ET 200 V4 x COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 or aGSD file for operation with PROFIBUS DP masters from Siemens or other vendors Section Describes Page Type files of the ET 200B modules A 2 GSD files of the ET 200B modules 4 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 1 Type Files and GSD Files A 1 TypeFiles of the ET 200B Modules Type File Provision of Type Files Digital Modules COM ET 200 V4 x COM ET 200 Windows and STEP 7 require a type file for each ET 200B module DP slave The type file contains the definitions of all the module s characteristics Before you start working with the software make sure that the type file of the ET 200B module is installed in a type file directory recognized by the software All the type files needed to start ET 200 with COM ET 200 V4 x COM ET 200 Windows and STEP 7 are available in the Interface Center The mo dem number to dial is 49 0911 737972 The designations of the type files for the digital ET 200B modules are as fo
32. 8 40 Parameters for ET 200B 4Al 8 41 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern GES7 134 0HF01 0XBO 8 65 8 42 Description of the Bits GES7 134 0 01 0 8 65 8 43 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5V 10V Complement of Twos 8 66 8 44 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5V 10V Amount and 8 66 8 45 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5V 10 V Binary 8 67 8 46 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Range 20 mA Complement of Twos 8 67 8 47 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Range 20 mA Amount and 8 68 8 49 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Range 0 20 8 69 8 50 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Range 4 20 8 69 8 51 Representation of an Analog Input Value as Bit Pattern for SIMATIC 57 ET 2
33. COM ET 200 Ver sion 4 x Configuration and Parameterization Telegram Chapters 5 through 8 contain information on configuration parameterization and diagnostics that you will need if you are working with the latest type files under COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 see Table 4 1 gray fields If you use COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 to configure and parameterize ET 200B modules the graphical user interfaces and the integral online help systems of these programs provide additional support The manual E7200 Distributed I O System Order No 6ES5 998 3ES12 con tains general information on working with COM ET 200 Windows Basic information on configuring and parameterizing distributed I O with STEP 7 is contained in the user manual entitled Standard Software for 7 and M7 STEP 7 If you configure and parameterize ET 200B analog modules with COM 200 Windows and the type file SIxxxxAE 200 you will find the requisite supplementary information in Appendix E of this manual If you configure and parameterize ET 200B modules with COM ET 200 ver sion 4 x you will find the information you need in Appendix D of this manual If you use configuration and parameterization telegrams to operate ET 200B e g CP 5431 as DP master you need the details of the layout of the configu ration and parameterization telegram which is module specific see Appen dix Bland C ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 4 5 E
34. In this Chapter In case you do not have access to the previous edition of this manual the most important information for configuring with COM ET 200 V 4 x is sum marized below In Section you will find on Page D 1 Status and error indication by LEDs D 2 Slave diagnostics D 3 Configuration options D 4 Setting the operating mode with COM ET 200 4 If information on these topics would be redundant you will find a reference to the corresponding section of the manual on COM ET 200 Windows Additional In The manual ET 200 Distributed I O System Order No 6 55 998 3ES 1 formation contains detailed information on how to use COM ET 200 V4 x ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c D 1 Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x D 1 Error Indication Digital ET 200B Error Indication Analog ET 200B Table D 1 LED RUN LED BF Off Off Lit green Off Lit green Lit green Flashing red Lit green Flashing red Lit red or off Lit red Lit red Status and Error Indication by LEDs See Table 5 1 Sectior 5 2 The table below explains the meanings of the signals provided by the LEDs on analog ET 200B modules for configuration with COM ET 200 V4 x LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings Check the power supply Voltage not applied to mod ule Module is on the PROFIBUS DP and is exchanging data An error has occurred on the module e g paramete
35. Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 89 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC and TB6 DC ET 200B 8DI 1 8RO AC 30 Galvanic 24 VV isolation PROFIBUS ES E m Logic 3 5v NV 1 LN 1 GR LI8X 24V M24 L1 N Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB6 AC 5 VM Station Suppr number selection logic fuse 1 1L1 2N 2L1 Conn ojo P AU Volt sens X Le V lo ale S cond e 4 So oe o Screw for grounded 2 configuration Digital Relay 120 230 V PE see Sectio inputs outputs AC supply Figure 7 57 Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC 6ES7 133 0HH00 0XBO and TB6 AC 200B Distributed Station 7 90 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC For the sake of clarity the table also shows the ter minal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB6 AC by way of exam ple Table 7 17 Pin Assignment of Terminal Bl
36. 32767 TFFFR Overflow 540 0 5400 400 1 4001 400 0 4000 Nominal range 270 0 2700 2701 573 Underrange If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs the analog input Overrange z 270 1 module signals underrun when FOC4y is undershot and outputs 8000 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 45 Analog Modules Measuring Range The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Type U Thermo ues for Type U thermocouples couples Table 8 36 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type U Thermocouples Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range in U Overrange Nominal range If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs the analog input module signals underrun when 80 is undershot and outputs 8000 200B Distributed Station 8 46 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 4 6 Block Diagram Terminal Assignment and Technical Data Block Diagram Simplified representation of potential for the ET 200B 4 8AI and TB8 ET 200B 4 8Al PROFIBUS DP 24V m K x 1 x 3 x 2 x 4 MA M L x1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block Analog TB8 Station number selection
37. Analog Modules Floating Ground Measurement A x 3 x 1 x 2 x 4 Ma O nx K 8 12 The figure below illustrates the connection of thermocouples of different types with one compensating box per channel floating ground measure ment V V V y V V K 1 03 04 1 31 4 K 10 1102 4 12 Shield Shie Rc box box Thermal link V V o Ucm 1V Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC et P PE MA Mexternal Figure 8 7 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box per Channel Floating Ground Measurement Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage x 1V must not be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Ground The figure below illustrates the connection of thermocouples of the same Referenced Mea type with one com
38. Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Disconnecting the For an ungrounded configuration you must also do the following at the digi Reference Poten tal terminal blocks tial of the Logic 1 Connect the PE terminal to the lower screw Circuits from PE 2 Remove the upper screw for an ungrounded configuration Figure 3 13 Upper Screw Removed in an Ungrounded Configuration Electrical Configu Figure 3 14 shows the ungrounded configuration for 24 V DC digital mod ration ules of the ET 200B 1 Ly x L2 15 4 L3 a N PE t 2 7 gt VcM ET 200B Mm 6 AM Sensor M L actuator Figure 3 14 Ungrounded Configuration for 24 V DC Digital Modules of the ET 200B ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 21 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior 3 5 Wiring the Terminal Block Introduction Wiring Floating Electron ics Block Non Floating Elec tronics Blocks 3 22 Connect the following to the terminal block e Supply voltage for internal logic circuits e Sensor supply for input channels Load voltage supply for output channels e Sensors loads The wiring of the terminal block is dependent on the electronics block used A distinction is made between floating and non floating electronics blocks In a floating electronics block either the ci
39. Technical Data The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the ET 200B 16DI The terminals for PE on the 4 terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB1 4 DC 3 and terminals 17 32 are interconnected as are M2 and terminals 33 48 The two L3 terminals are also interconnected The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 1 6 A in the terminal blocks Nevertheless make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in the technical data for the electronics block The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 16DI is listed in the tables below Technical specifications Inputs Baud rates Bus protocol FREEZE capability Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Typ 2 5 W Approx 600 g 21 oz 160 x 130 x 60 mm 6 24 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Diagnostics functions Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SI NEC L2 DP Status of inputs Green RUN LED Red BF LED Green LEDs Number of inputs Galvanic isolation to inter nal electronic circuits Input voltage e Rated value For 0 signal For 1 signal Input current for 1 sig nal Delay of inputs Connection of 2 wire BERO Quiescent current Connection of mechan
40. The pin assignment of the 9 pin PROFIBUS DP interface of the terminal block is described below Table 3 6 Pin Assignment of the PROFIBUS DP Interface Designation RxD TxD P Data line B RTS Request To Send 5 2 Data reference potential from station Supply plus from station 2 Terminal block as viewed from in front ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Connecting the Bus Cable Dimensional Draw ings with Bus Con nectors The procedure for connecting the bus cable to the bus connector is described in detail in the following manuals Manual ET 200 Distributed I O System Manual 7 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Manual M7 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Manual 7 400 M7 400 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installa tion Chapters 7 and 8 contain dimensional drawings of ET 200B modules with bus connectors installed ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 27 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuration and Parameterization In this Chapter Before startup you must configure and parameterize the modules of the ET 200B distributed I O station This chapter contains information on Configuration Options Requirements for Configuration Where to Find the Requisite Information ET 200B Distributed Sta
41. lt V V V 0 3 0 4 1 31 4 MA L L K 10 10 25 1 1 1 2 MAM M f Shield i j Sie DA 24V 5 5 Le RL RL Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC a Lei mal PE Mexternal Figure 8 25 4 Wire Connection of Loads for Voltage Output ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 79 Analog Modules 2 Wire Connec tion of Loads Voltage Output B 8 80 The sensor lines are not required for 2 wire connection Two wire connection is possible for voltage output if the line resistance of the signal lines is negli gible compared to the load resistance 2 wire connection of loads for voltage output is shown below V V V AB AB V V V K jo3alo4 13 1 4 MALH L K 10 2 1 11 2 MAM e Shield Shed 24V RL RL Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC a gt t Mexternal Figure 8 26 2 Wire Connection of Loads for Voltage Output ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Two Wire Connec Two wire connection of loads for current output is shown below tion of Loads
42. 1 25 2 14131211109 8 76 5 43 2 1 0 2047 1 2494 01111111111 2046 1 2488 01 1 11 11 1 0 0006 0 0 0000 1 0 0006 2047 1 2494 2048 1 2500 200 Distributed Station 8 66 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Table 8 45 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Measur ing Ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5 V 10 V Binary Units Measured Value in V Digitized Measured Value X OV Range 1 25V 5V 10 15 14131211109 8 76 5 110 Current Measuring olni The tables below show the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Ranges ues for the measuring ranges 0 20 mA 4 20 mA 20 mA The ET 200B 4AI module 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 does not have an over range Table 8 46 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Measuring Range 20 mA Complement of Twos Units Mea Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range sured Value in mA 20mA 15 14131211109 8 76 5 2 140 2047 19 9902 0 O 1 1 1 1 1 2046 19 9804 0 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 00976 0 0 0000 1 0 00976 2047 19 9902 2048 20 0000 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 67 Analog Modules Table 8 47 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 Measuring Range 20 mA Amoun
43. o 413 00 oo oo oo 19 19 19 io 19 00 00 00 06 20 00 00 00 00 Note As regards parameterization of the functions of the analog modules only the bytes with borders in the Figures are of relevance other bytes contain 00g or COM ET 200 V4 x specific codes that you must leave unchanged Parameters for The meanings of the bytes with borders in the figures above are as fol Analog Modules lows Table D 8 Content and Meanings of the Bytes in the Parameterization Telegram Breakdown Diagnostics message enable per channel group Bit 0 channel group O Bit is 1 Diagnostics message enabled Bit 1 channel group 1 Bit is 0 Diagnostics message disabled default Bit 2 channel group 2 Bit 3 channel group 3 Wire break monitor enable only ET 200B 4 8AI with selected value range Pt 100 thermocouple or voltage sensor 80 mV Bit 0 channel group 0 Bit is 1 Diagnostics message enabled Bit 1 channel group 1 Bit is 0 Diagnostics message disabled default Bit 2 channel group 2 Bit 3 channel group 3 If wire break occurs the overflow bit is also set Setting for integration time ET 200B 4 8AI only AAg Integration time 20 ms for 50 Hz supply default 4 8AI 55g Integration time 16 7 ms for 60 Hz supply 4 8AI ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089
44. 24V UP ur Max 75 DC Max 75 V DC 60 V 60 V AC eut Ma Mexternal Figure 8 18 Two Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B 4AI Ground Referenced Measurement ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Connecting Cur rent Sensors Floating Ground Measurement B 3 1 x2x4 Current sensors for following measured value ranges can be connected 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 20 mA Figures 8 19 and 8 20 show the two methods of connecting current sensors The 2 wire connection of current sensors floating ground measurement is shown below V V V AC 4B AB TB8 lt lt gt y y y K4 0 5 04 13 14 K 10 1102 412 MAM M 2 Shield A 24V MA 414 VcM lt 1V Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC MA Mexternal Figure 8 19 Two Wire Connection of Current Sensors Floating Ground Measurement Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage Vcw 1 V must not be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 57 Analog Modules Ground Referenced Mea s
45. 45 46 47 48 M M2 eejjeoeseoeooeosgeeesoeoeg 25 5 25 5 19 2 121 7 HE H oH 5 amp SIEMENS In 0 57 193 0CR20 0XRD i M AN Pe ES Ue ieee 000006 TED E dioe ed QUE dua eU BUS p O mea 2 ee eee eee eee T RUN STOP 2 gelloedd 8 8 E cl ew 2 222 i S L 3 D ooejoooo oooooooo oo0 o oo 3 EJ 1 E s 1 1 zl M 3 4 122 of 72 16 Figure 7 3 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB1 4 DC Screw Type Terminal 4 Terminal Number Figure 7 4 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the ing TB1 4 DC screw type terminal 4 tier 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28129 30 311 32 LI amp L24L 3 3 33 34 35 36 137 38 39140141142 143 44 45 46 47 48 M1 M2 M3 M3
46. 7 internally jumpered Voltage supply L3 for channel group Q1 0 to 3 internally jumpered Ground M2 for chan nel group QO 4 to 7 internally jumpered Ground M3 for chan nel group Q1 0 to 3 internally jumpered Terminal tier 4 PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw 7 35 Digital Modules Table 7 6 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and TB4M DC for ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 132 0 11 0 0 continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41 25 Q1 Output 4 57 Voltage supply L4 89 Ground MA for chan PE internally jump for channel group nel group Q1 4 to 7 ered but not con 26 not used 58 i 5 QI 4 to 7 internally jumpered nected to PE screw 27 Q1 Output 5 internally jumpered E 29 Q1 Output 6 31 Q1 Output 7 EJ L5 Voltage supply inter 5 Ground connection PE internally jump nal logic internal logic ered but not con L5 Voltage supply inter M5 Ground connection nected to PE screw nal logic internal logic 1 TB2 4 DC only in the TB4M DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections see Section 7 2 7 Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 16DO 2A The terminals for PE on the 4 tier terminal block are not connected to the PE
47. 7 2 5 Terminal Block TB2 4 DC 6ES7 193 0CB20 0XA0 Dimensional Draw Figure 7 9 is a dimensional drawing of the TB2 4 DC screw type terminal ing 4 tier 2 3141516171819 n w v w wu w fie 17 i a 21 2 23 74 5 76 27 28 3 a0 31137 T 49 50 51 52 53 54 58 se 57 58 59 RL 2 63 64 5415 65 68 67 58 6 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 8 80 81 82 8384 85 86 87 88 32 83 4 35 96 AS 15 eejjee jejje ejee eje e e eeeesjeeje eee sj e e 25 7 25 7 SIEMENS 1p 57 193 0820 0 80 126 9 ooo BADANA PROFIBUS DP 193 0c820 oxao TB2 4 DC Figure 7 9 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB2 4 DC Screw Type Terminal 4 Tier Terminal Number ing Figure 7 10 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the TB2 4 DC screw type terminal 4 tier 8 3 10 0 12 13 M 15 16 17 18 119 20 21122 23 4 5 26 27 28 29 30 31132 33 134 35 36 37 38 3 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51152 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 L o4 5 65 66167 08 62170171172 173174 75 76 T7 78 79 60 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 188 189 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 M5 MS o eooooooo0eoosoeool9o0
48. 737972 Major Characteris In case the GSD file is not available the major characteristics of the tics ET 200B modules are listed in the tables below This information will suffice to start ET 200B with a CP 5431 for example ET 200B Distributed Station 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Type Files and GSD Files 16DI 32DI 16DO and 16DO 2A The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules 16DI 32DI 32DI 0 2 ms 16DO and 16DO 2A Table A 3 Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part 3 for ET 200B 16DI ET 200B 32DI ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms ET 200B 16DO ET 200B 16DO 2A Characteristic DP Keyword to 16DI 32DI 32DI 16DO 16DO 2A EN 50170 Part 3 0 2ms Manufacturer ID Ident Number 0001g 0004H 000CH 00024 0005H Supports 9 6 kbaud Supports 19 2 kbaud Supports 93 75 kbaud Supports 187 5 kbaud 93 75_supp 187 5_supp Supports 500 kbaud Supports 1 5 Mbaud 500_supp 1 5M_supp Supports 3 Mbaud Supports 6 Mbaud Supports 12 Mbaud 3M_supp 6M_supp 12M_supp Supports FREEZE control command Supports autobaud search Freeze Mode supp Auto Baud supp Software settable station number Set Slave Add supp No Length of user specific data parameterization telegram User specific data parameterization telegram Modular station User Prm Data Len 5 Byte Ut il ii ii Modular Station No ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Type
49. 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 N N 65 66 67 68 69 70 1 72 73174 75 76 T7 78 79 80 Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 1 Sensor voltage 1L1 for channel Sensor voltage for channel 2 I0 0 to 3 10 0 to 3 5 10 Sensor voltage 2L1 for channel 74 Sensor voltage 2N for channel 11 10 4 to 7 10 4 to 7 13 10 Input 4 14 10 Input 5 15 10 Input 16 10 Input 17 Input Sensor voltage 3L1 for channel Sensor voltage 3N for channel 18 Input IL 0 to 3 0 to 3 19 Input 20 I1 Input 52 n n 26 not used 58 Sensor voltage 411 for channel 90 Sensor voltage 4N for channel I1 4 to 7 Il 4 to 7 ET 200B Distributed I O Station 7 76 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Table 7 14 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16DI AC 6ES7 131 0HF00 0XBO continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 not used Sensor voltage 4L1 for channel Sensor voltage 4N for channel Il 4 to 7 Il 4 to 7 not used Input 4 Input 5 I1 Input 6 Input 7 a L1 Voltage supply internal logic N Voltage supply internal logic EX NENNEN E Voltage supply internal logic N Voltage supply internal logic Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 16DI AC e finstalled in
50. Device Related Diagnostics for Analog 200 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c E 3 Analog Modules and Old Type Files Device Related Device related diagnostics of the analog ET 200B modules comprises a max Diagnostics imum of 18 bytes Byte 7 00g Reserved Byte 8 00 Reserved Bytes 9 to 24 Diagnostics data see 3 Tables E 2 to E 5 Figure 2 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 7 to 24 Bytes 9 to 12 Table E 2 shows the structure and contents of bytes 9 to 12 Table E 2 Diagnostics Data Bytes 9 to 12 0 Diagnostics message waiting EM Wrong ET 200B station type 11 External error e g wire break 9 E 3 3 E EPROM error 4AI 10 ADC DAC error 4 5 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 7 Reserved ET 200B Distributed Station 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules and Old Type Files Possible Values The possible values for byte 9 are as follows Byte 9 Table E 3 Possible Values for Byte 9 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning Es pepe p em 03g 834 Internal error no channel error incorrect parameters in the module OBy 8By Internal error channel error incorrect parameters in the module 1 External error channel error OF y 8F x 1 1 1 1 Summation error of all the above errors incorrect parameters in the
51. Dummy value for channel 1 32786 32767 Dummy value for channel 2 Dummy value for channel 3 Default 200B Distributed Station 8 84 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 6 4 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S5 Analog Value Rep resentation SI MATIC S7 Analog Value Rep resentation Sl MATIC S5 If you operate the ET 200B 4AO with SIMATIC 55 you can utilize the ana log value representation of SIMATIC 57 See Sectio for the measured value tables for analog value representation in SIMATIC 57 Analog values are represented in complements of twos with the ET 200 4 The table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B 4AO Table 8 59 Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern 6ES7 135 0 01 0 0 Analog value representation High Byte Low Byte isi o TuTu Pw Ts SI 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 123 22 21 1206 X IX X X Supplementary Bits Bits 0 3 and 15 have no significance for the amount of the measured value See Table 8 60 for a detailed description of these bits Bits 0 3 and 15 have the following meaning in the bit pattern of the analog output value Table 8 60 Description of the Bits 6 57 135 0 01 0 0 Bit Meaning Signal Status Meaning of the Signal Status SI Sign sign 1 eo sign X Irrelevant 200B Distributed
52. Gh ee rr ets eta ast erter se seer e tee rere e 65 66 67 68 63 70 71 72 13 74 15 76 177178 79180 8118253184185 186167188189180181192193 184195 96 le TE T m AA EAE EAE P E 3 xn 11 Ea 1 117 16 ty J 125 Figure 7 11 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB4 DC Spring Latch Terminal Figure 7 12 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the Terminal Number TB4 DC spring latch terminal ing 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 23 30 31 32 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 62 63 64 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89190 91 92 93 94 95 96 55 a ALALALALALALALALARS 112 3 41 5 1 8 9 10 1017013 4 16 33 31 35 36 37 38 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 0 172 73 4 75 76 77 8 79 80 eo a ans wan vans i 1 1 1 Figure 7 12 Terminal Numbering Termina
53. PROFIBUS DP isolation m Logic i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 sai d M24 0 3 1 7 2N 0 3 3N4 7 4N L1 N X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB6 AC 5VM Station Bn number selection logic fuse 1 PROFI Voltage 111 211 3L1 4L1 BUS DP sensor e 1N oe 2N 3N e AN conductori 9 o o 7 Screw for grounding Digital 120 230 V PE see Sed 3a inputs AC supply Figure 7 51 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI AC 6ES7 131 0HF00 0XBO and TB6 AC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 75 Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 16DI AC For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal block taking the TB6 AC by way of example Table 7 14 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16DI AC 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46147 48 6ES7 131 0HF00 0XBO Terminal numbering TB6 AC 1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 22 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 n 2 13 14 15 I6 43 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62163 6411 LI 81 82 83 84 85 86
54. R Upper lower limit value overshoot is displayed for channel 2 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 19 Status and Error Diagnostics Table 5 8 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics and Process Alarms continued Bit Byte 10 01g Diagnostics Alarm Byte 10 025 Process Alarm Module class Analog module Channel 0 Lower limit value over 00 Reserved shoot 4 8AI 4AT Channel 1 Lower limit value over shoot 4 8AI Channel 2 Lower limit value over shoot 4 8AI 4AT Channel 3 Reserved Channel information available Channel 4 Reserved 00g Reserved 00g Reserved o Z 00g Reserved 00g Reserved Reserved Possible Values In a diagnostics alarm the possible values of byte 13 are as follows Byte 13 Table 5 9 Possible Values for Byte 13 in Diagnostics Alarm Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning 1 1 1 8By 8 Internal error channel error incorrect parameters the module External error channel error 1 1 1 Summation error of all above errors incorrect parameters the module 200B Distributed Station 5 20 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics Bytes 17 to 28 Table 5 10 shows the structure and contents of bytes 17 to 28 for diagnostics Diagnostics alarm only Alarm Table 5 10 Bytes 17 to 28 for Diagnostics Alarm Byte Bit Meanin
55. V V V b TB8 V V V K 0 5104 13 14 K f0 110 2N 1 11 2 lo Ja lc a 24V Y lc Last lac Pt100 Pt100 Ucm 1V Max gt 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC E phat Mexternal Figure 8 11 Connection of Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 with 4 Wire Connections Floating Ground Measurement Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage Vcw 1V must not be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Ground The connection of resistance thermometers Pt 100 with 4 wire connections Referenced Mea ground referenced measurement is shown below surement A D 7 7 V x 3 x 1 x 2 x 4M AC D D T P E px KC TB8 y V V V K4 0 5 04 1 3 14 MAL L4 K f0 110 2 11 1 1 2 T Shield A 24V lc 4 Y lc Pt100 Pt100 Max DC 75V Max DC 75V AC 60V AC 60V a t PE Ma Mexternal Figure 8 12 Connection of Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 with 4 Wire Connections Ground Referenced Measurement ET 200B D
56. WxHxD Diagnostics functions The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 32DO is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Max 7 9 W Approx 800 g 28 oz 235 x 130 x 60 mm 9 17 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring Status of outputs Green RUN LED Red LED Red DIA LED Green L1 L2 L3 L4 LEDs Green LEDs Supply voltage for outputs load voltage supply and internal logic Supply voltage L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Rated value Permissible range e Value for t lt 0 5 s Pt for inrush current Current consumption from L5 Logic 24 V DC 18 5 to 30 2 V 35V 0 05 A s Typ 75 mA ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Outputs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation e n groups of Output voltage For 0 signal For 1 signal Output current For 0 signal For 1 signal Delay of outputs From 0 to 1 From 1 to 0 Switching frequency e Resistive load Inductive load Lamp load Short circuit protection Load current per group Total current Lamp load Setting a digital input Limitation of voltage in duced on current interrup tion Cable length 32 Yes Max 2 V i
57. f 65 T To P ps p p ri T p e ge p p p Ju 5 E Figure 7 29 Front Elevation ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 132 0 11 0 0 ET 200B Distributed Station 7 32 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B 16DO 2A and TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET 200B 16D0 2A PROFIBUS DP di 5 4V gt Logic 4 J 5V pea ooze ae a i ES _ 4 4 HE 2 ES ur Ee ES LAX 00 00 Q1 Q1 11 1 0 3 L2 M2 4 7 _ L3 M3 0 3 414 7 L5 M5 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 DC or Station TB4 DC number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN switch Connection Suppr Suppr Suppr Suppr PROFIBUS DP logic logic logic logic M5 L14M1 L2 4M2 L34M3 L4 4M4 L5 M5 ojo 3 o E Aa d o e Ground e e e 7e Screw for ground Digital 24 V ing see Sec 3 4 outputs supply
58. handling the product or to a particular part of the documentation Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission to ground and to tag circuits equipment and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards Correct Usage Note the following Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported stored set up and installed correctly and operated and maintained as recommended Trademarks SIMATIC and SINEC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks the own er s rights may be violated if they are used be third parties for their own purposes Copyright Siemens AG 1995 All rights reserved The reproduction transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grantor registration o
59. in the terminal blocks Nevertheless make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in the technical data for the electronics block 200B Distributed Station 7 66 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data tables below Technical Data 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Baud rates Bus protocol FREEZE and SYNC capa bility Galvanic isolation to SI Yes NEC L2 DP bus Max 5 5 W Approx 800 g 28 oz Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD 235 x 130 x 60 Diagnostics functions Inputs continued Input current For 1 signal Delay of inputs Connection of 2 wire BERO Quiescent current Connection of mechanical switches Cable length of sensors Unshielded The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 16DI 16D0 is listed in the Typ 4 mA at 24 V Min 2 mA 3ms Possible lt 1 5 mA Possible Max 100 m 328 ft Green RUN LED Red BF LED Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for Red DIA LED short circuit load voltage failure Green L1 L2 LEDs Green LEDs Load voltage monitoring Status of inputs and out puts Supply voltage for outputs load voltage supply and internal logic Supply voltages L1 L2 4 L5 Rated value Permissible range e Value for t lt 0 5 s 24 V DC 18 5 30 2 V 35
60. ing time S Segment Short circuit Station number STEP 7 SYNC Glossary 6 PROFIBUS system supporting the DP protocol DP stands for dezentrale Peripherie or distributed I O The ET 200 distributed I O system is based on the PROFIBUS DP standard EN 50170 Part 3 Siemens also uses the designation SINEC L2 DP for PROFIBUS DP A conductor required as a protective measure against electric shock currents The symbol for the protective ground conductor is PE Potential in relation to which the voltages of the circuits concerned are con sidered and or measured A slave parameter in COM ET 200 If a slave station is not addressed within the response monitoring time it automatically goes to the safe state i e all outputs are set to 0 The bus cable between two terminating resistors forms a segment A segment contains 0 32 bus stations Segments can be linked by repeaters A conductive connection caused by a fault between conductors that are live in normal operation if no load resistance is inserted in the faulty circuit Each ET 200 bus station must be assigned a station number The program ming device is addressed at station number 0 Masters and slaves are assigned station numbers in the range 3 125 Excep tion ET 200B is assigned a station number in the range 3 99 Programming language for generating application programs for SIMATIC S7 controllers gt control command issue
61. inte grating ET 200B 4AI 4 analog differential inputs measuring principle successive approximation ET 200 4 4 analog outputs List of Terminal A single terminal block is available for all analog electronics blocks Blocks Table 8 2 Analog Terminal Block of ET 200B 4 8 channel spring latch terminals 200B Distributed Station 8 2 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 2 Terminal Block TB8 6 57 193 0CD40 0XA0 Dimensional Draw Dimensional drawing terminal block 8 spring latch terminals ing TB8 160 Mounting holes 25 5 25 5 121 7 SIEMENS 1P 57 f93 0CD40 0XRO 000000 RUN EI ea x 5 1 Figure 8 1 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block 8 Spring Latch Terminals Terminal Number Figure 8 2 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the TB8 ing spring latch terminals v0 v v2 v3 laesi Coding plug Figure 8 2 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block 8 Spring Latch Terminals ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 3 Analog Modules 8 3 Termina
62. internally jump 12 Input 3 60 connected to L5 age connected to ered but not con M5 nected to PE screw ie 12 Input 5 62 I2 Input 6 I2 Input 7 Voltage supply Ground connection PE internally jump internal logic and internal logic and ered but not con sensor voltage 24 V sensor voltage nected to PE screw internal logic and internal logic and sensor voltage 24 V sensor voltage 1 L5 Voltage supply Ground connection 1 TB2 4 DC only in the TB4M DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections see Section 7 2 7 Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 24DI 8DO and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2 ms The terminals for PE on the 4 tier terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB2 4 DC e Ifall actuators are connected by two wire cables to the TB2 DC TB4 DC or TB2 4 DC connect the ground of an actuator and the supply for the reference potential per group by means of a DIN 46231 cable cleat e 1 and L5 and and 5 are not interconnected e L5 and terminals 41 64 are interconnected as are M5 and terminals 73 96 e The two L5 terminals are also interconnected Fuse The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 2 5 A in the terminal blocks Nevertheless make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in the technical data for the electronics block ET 200B Distribut
63. 0 0 continued Measurement type and range for chan nel group 0 Measurement type and range for chan nel group 1 Measurement type and range for chan nel group 2 Measurement type and range for chan nel group 3 Representation of measured values You can set the measurement type and range separately for each channel group For voltage measurement For resistance thermometer with linea rization For thermocouple with external refer ence junction For resistance measurement Sets representation of the measured val ues for module Channel not activated 1V 0 5 0 25 80 mV Pt 100 standard range Ni 100 standard range Type N with linearization Type E with linearization Type J with linearization Type L with linearization Type T with linearization Type K with linearization Type U with linearization 48 ohms 150 ohms 300 ohms 600 ohms SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC 57 Measured value representation S5 Sets data format for analog value repre sentation SIMATIC S5 Complement of twos Amount with sign Upper limit value for channel 0 Lower limit value for channel 0 Upper limit value for channel 2 channel 1 Lower limit value for channel 2 channel 1 Upper and lower limit values for each channel 0 32768 32767 0 32768 32767 0 32768 32767 0 32768 32767 Default For the ET 200B 4 8AL only
64. 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 Chan el 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 3 0 31 3 3 3 4 x A start address is assigned for the entire mod ule addresses for8 words arereserved module ad dressing 8x LAI px x x A separate start address can be x x x assigned for 1AI PF x x x each channel single channel ad 5 4 dressing 3 2 1 8 20 Length of user data X Connection of measuring lines Note If you connect voltage sensors thermocouples and resistors thermal resistors to the same module you have a mixed configuration as shown in Tables 8 5 8 6 see example below ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Configuration for Resistors Thermal Table 8 6 shows the possible configurations of the ET 200B 4 8AI with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 for connecting thermal resistors and for Resistors resistance measurement Table 8 6 lists only the slots for configuring the input areas slots 4 to 7 Slots 1 to 3 have the default value 004 Table 8 6 Possible IDs for Configuring the Input Areas of ET 200B 4 8AI with only Thermal resistors and Re sistors Connected uration Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 Chan nel 0 0 1 0 2 Chan nel 1 0 3 0 4 Chan Chan ne
65. 02c xiii Contents for Pt 100 Resistance Sensors 8 29 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AlI for Ni 100 Resistance Sensors 8 42 8 30 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AlI with Linearization Type E Thermocouples 8 43 8 31 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200 4 8 with Linearization Type J Thermocouples 8 32 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type K Thermocouples 8 33 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type L Thermocouples 8 44 8 34 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type Thermocouples 8 45 8 35 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AlI with Linearization Type T Thermocouples 8 45 8 36 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AlI with Linearization Type U Thermocouples 8 37 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200 4 8 8 38 Possible Configurations for the Input Areas of ET 200B 4Al 8 39 Assignment of Terminals to Channels
66. 02c D 13 Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x Table D 8 Content and Meanings of the Bytes in the Parameterization Telegram continued Byte Breakdown Code 7 8 9 Setting for analog value range M Byte 7 channel group 0 194 10 V default 4AO Byte 8 2 channel group 1 18g 0 10 4 Byte 9 channel group 2 164 5V 4AI Byte 10 channel 15g 2 5V group 3 14g 1 25 V for ET 200B 4AI 14H 1 V for ET 200B 4 8AI default 4 8AI 13g 0 5 V 4 8AI 12g 0 25 4 8 80 mV 4 8AI 24g 20 mA 4AO 224 0 20 mA 4AO 23H 4 20 mA 4AO 82H Pt 100 Standard 5 Thermocouple Type J with linearization E8g Thermocouple Type K with linearization Thermocouple L with linearization 23 Selection for measured value representation ET 200B 4AI and ET 200B 4 8AI only D 14 00g Oly 02g Complement of twos Amount and sign Binary 4 4 8AI 4 4 8AI 4AI ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules and Old Type Files Introduction You do not need the information in this chapter unless you want to replace old analog modules that you configured with the type file SIxxxxAE 200 under COM ET 200 Windows with the new analog modules order numbers see Appendix described in this manual If you use the type file SIXxxxBE 200 for configuring under COM ET 200 Windows you can ignore this ch
67. 1 1 1 9 x QO 0 7 10 0 7 1 L3 4M X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB1 4 DC Station Bi number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN Connection switch PROFIBUS DP N 11 L34M E Voltage G e x A 4 No o 9 0 Ground i EN 7 oF e e Screw for grounding 24 V see Sec Outputs Inputs supply Figure 7 43 Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6ES7 133 0BH10 0XB0 and TB1 4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 57 Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB1 4 DC by way of example Table 7 10 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6ES7 133 0BH10 0XBO Terminal numbering TB1 4 DC Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 4 24 V sensor voltage Ground outputs in PE internally jump internally jumpered ternally jumpered ered but not con connected to L3 35 connecte
68. 193 0CB10 0XA0 Terminal Block TB2 4 DC 6ES7 193 0 20 0 Terminal Block TB4 DC 6ES7 193 0CB30 0XA0 Terminal Block TBAM DC 6ES7 193 0 0 Terminal Block TB6 AC 6 57 193 0CC10 0XAO0 Terminal Block and Bus Connector Electronics Electronics Block ET 200B 16DI 6 57 131 0BH00 0XBO Electronics Blocks ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO and 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6 57 131 0BL10 0XBO Electronics Block ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0BH01 0XB0 Electronics Block ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 132 0 11 0 Electronics Block ET 200B 32DO 6 57 132 0BL01 0XBO0 Electronics block ET 200B 8RO 6ES7 132 0GF00 0XBO0 Electronics Block ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BH01 0XBO0 Electronics Block ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6ES7 133 0BH10 0XBO Electronics Block ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 133 OBLOO 0XBO Electronics Blocks ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 01 0 0 and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6ES7 133 11 0 Electronics Block ET 200B 16DI AC 6ES7 131 0HF00 0XBO Electronics Block ET 200B 16DO AC 6ES7 132 0HF00 0XBO Electronics Block ET 200B 16RO AC 6ES7 132 0HH00 0XBO Electronics Block ET 200B 8DI
69. 1968 ft Possible ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Introduction There are a number of analog modules for connecting measured value sen sors and loads actuators In this Chapter This chapter contains the technical data for the analog modules The technical data for each analog module is accompanied by details of the measured value sensors and loads that can be connected information on analog value display for operation with SIMATIC 55 and S7 alist of permissible address IDs and the parameters of the analog modules you will find Analog modules Terminal block TB8 6ES7 193 0CD40 0XA0 In Section 8 1 8 2 8 3 Terminal block TB8 and bus connector 8 4 8 5 Electronics block ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 Electronics block ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 8 6 Electronics block ET 200B 4AO 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XB0 8 76 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 1 Analog Modules 8 1 Analog Modules Introduction The tables below give an overview of the ET 200B analog modules List of Electronics The following types of electronics block are available Blocks Table 8 1 Analog Electronics Blocks of ET 200B Electronics block Description ET 200B 4 8AI 8 analog differential inputs or 8 X thermocouples 4 X resistance measurement 4 X resis tance thermometer PT 100 Ni 100 measuring principle
70. 2 oooocooooooooooooo00 di Ye 3 Y kl 1 7 a e z 9 4 72 16 Figure 7 1 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB1 DC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier Terminal Number ing Figure 7 2 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the screw type terminal 3 tier 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28129 30 31 32 L1 L2 L3 L3 33 34 35136 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44145 46 47 48 M Figure 7 2 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB1 DC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 5 Digital Modules 7 2 2 Terminal Block TB1 4 DC 6ES7 193 0CA20 0XA0 Dimensional Draw Figure 7 3 is a dimensional drawing of the TB1 4 DC screw type terminal ing 4 tier i 2 s 4 s e 7 e s o n v is u is ie 17 18 9 20 2t 22 23 24 25 126 27 2e 29 0 31 32 Lis L2 24 24 3s 34 35 36 3738 39 40 41 4 44
71. 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6ES7 133 0BNI11 0XBO 200B Distributed Station 7 68 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 24DI 8DO or ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2 ms and TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET 200B 24D1 8D0 ET200B 24DI 8DO PROFIBUS DP 0 2ms 5V 4V Logic 5V T 09 ___ T LA ose i i Driver 1 10 0 7 MIN 1 a 8x 1 i 24x I2 0 7 QO gt 5 5 11 1 10 7 t X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 DC or Station CI ANS number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN Suppr switch Connection logic PROFIBUS DP L1 M1 L54 5 5 o 51 re 5 9 Supply nd Voltage a e SN lee Ground 9 A e 4 e d d PE Screw for grounding Digital Digital 24 V see Sec outputs inputs supply Figure 7 48 Block Diagram ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BN01 0XB0 or ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6ES7 133 0BN11 0XBO and TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 69 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 24
72. 2_supp Yes Supports 93 75 kbaud 93 75 supp Yes Supports 187 5 kbaud 187 5 supp Yes Supports 500 kbaud 500 supp Yes Supports 1 5 Mbaud 1 5M supp Yes Supports 3 Mbaud 3M supp Yes Supports 6 Mbaud 6M supp Yes Supports 12 Mbaud 12M supp Yes Supports FREEZE control Freeze Mode supp Yes Yes command Supports SYNC control Sync Mode supp Yes Yes Yes command Supports autobaud search Auto Baud supp Yes Software settable station Set Slave Add supp No number Length of user specific data User Prm Data Len 5 Byte 00 00 00 00g 00 Modular station Modular Station No ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Type Files and GSD Files 4 8Al 4 and 4AO The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules 4 8AI 4AI and 4AO Table A 7 Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part 3 for ET 200B 4 8AI ET 200B 4AI ET 200 4 Characteristic DP Keyword to 4 8AI 4AI EN 50170 Part 3 Manufacturer ID Ident Number Supports 9 6 kbaud 9 6 supp Supports 19 2 kbaud 19 2 supp Supports 93 75 kbaud 93 75 supp Supports 187 5 kbaud 187 5 supp Supports 500 kbaud 500 supp Yes Yes Yes Supports 1 5 Mbaud 5M Yes Supports 3 Mbaud Yes Supports 6 Mbaud E Yes Yes Supports 12 Mbaud 12M supp Supports FREEZE control Freeze Mode supp command Supports SYNC control Sync Mode supp Yes command Supports autobaud search Aut
73. 5 to 30 2 V 35V Typ 85 mA 1 0 05 A s Number of inputs Galvanic isolation to inter nal electronic circuits Input voltage Rated value For 0 signal e For 1 signal Input current for 1 signal 24 No 24 V DC 30 Vto5V 13 V to 30 V Typ 4 mA at 24 V Min 2 mA ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Number of outputs Galvanic isolation e groups of Output voltage For 0 signal For 1 signal Output current For 0 signal For 1 signal Delay of outputs From 0 to 1 From 1 to 0 Switching frequency e Resistive load Inductive load Lamp load Short circuit protection Load current Total current Lamp load Setting a digital input Limitation of voltage in duced on current interrup tion Cable length Max 2 V idle Min supply voltage 3V Max 1 mA Max 0 5 A Approx 20 us Max 0 5 ms Max 1000 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Max 8 Hz Yes 2 Max 5 W Possible L5 55 V Max 100 m 328 ft Tn operation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate 181500 kbaud 7 73 Digital Modules 7 3 11 Electronics Block ET 200B 16DI AC 6ES7 131 0HF00 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 16DI AC electronics block has the following characteristics e 16 inputs floating in groups of 4 Input voltage 120 230 V AC e Suitable for s
74. 5V Mn pe E dac cu c p mtem CN E TER pO at Drivedi Driver Drived Driver LOW cL gus ES 8x 3 8x 8x ES 18x 00 Q1 Q2 Q3 L1 M1 0 7 L22 M2 0 7 L3 M3 0 7 410 7 L5 M5 X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 DC or Station TB4 DC number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN switch Connection Suppr Suppr Suppr Suppr PROFIBUS DP logic logic logic logic L1 M1 L244M2 L34M3 14 4 L5 M5 M5 o lo o 4 b o Supply o amp ol o Ground e gt gt D PE Screw for ground Digital 24 V ing see Sec 3 4 outputs supply Figure 7 33 Block Diagram ET 200B 32DO 6ES7 132 0BL01 0XBO and TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 39 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 32DO and TB2 4 DC PROFIBUS DP i 5V ET 200B 32DO 34 be E eS i Pod
75. 6E 70 71 72 73 4 75 76 77 78 79 80 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 189190 91 92 93 94 95 96 M5 MS S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Terminal tier 1 00 Output 4 00 Output 5 00 Output Terminal tier 2 Voltage supply L1 for channel group QO 0 to 7 internally jumpered Terminal tier 3 Ground for chan nel group QO 0 to 7 internally jumpered 5 6 7 QO Output 8 9 Q1 Output 10 QI Output 12 QI Output 13 Q1 Output 14 Q1 Output 6 7 0 1 QI Output 2 3 4 6 15 QI Output 16 QI Output 7 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Voltage supply L2 for channel group Q1 4 to 7 internally jumpered Voltage supply L3 for channel group Q2 0 to 7 internally jumpered Ground M2 for chan nel group Q01 0 to 7 internally jumpered Ground M3 for chan nel group Q2 0 to 7 internally jumpered Terminal tier 4 PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw 7 41 Digital Modules Table 7 7 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and TB4M DC for ET 200B 32DO 6ES7 132 0BLO01 0XBO continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41 Q3 Output 0 57 Voltage supply L4 89 Ground MA for chan PE inte
76. 7 ms 20 ms 1V 0 5 V 0 25 V 80 mV Pt 100 standard range Type J with linearization Type L with linearization Type K with linearization SIMATIC 55 SIMATIC 57 Complement of twos Amount with sign Default E 8 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules and Old Type Files Parameters for ET 200B 4AI Table 8 40 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B 4AI with COM ET 200 Windows You can set these parameters for the ET 200B AAI if you use the type file SI8019AE 200 Table E 8 Parameter Diagnostics enable for channel 0 Diagnostics enable for channel 1 Diagnostics enable for channel 2 Diagnostics enable for channel 3 Wire break monitoring enable for channel 0 Wire break monitoring enable for channel 1 Wire break monitoring enable for channel 2 Wire break monitoring enable for channel 3 Parameters for ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Explanation Value Range Diagnostics messages enabled sepa rately for each channel Wire break monitoring enabled sepa rately for each channel for measuring range 4 20 mA Disable Enable Measurement type and range for chan nel 0 Measurement type and range for chan nel 1 Measurement type and range for chan nel 2 Measurement type and range for chan nel 3 You can set the measurement type and range separately for each channel For voltage measurement For curre
77. 8DO 16RO AC and 8DI 8RO AC Electronics Blocks 3 3 Clearances Required for Installation of the 4 8Al 4Al and 4AO Electronics Blocks with Shield Connecting Element 3 4 Hanging the Terminal Block on the Standard Sectional Rail and Setting the Coding Slide Switch 3 6 Mounting the Shield Connecting Element on the Standard Sectional Rail Mounting the Terminal Block on the Shield Connecting Element Changing the Setting of the Coding Plug Engaging the Electronics Block on the Terminal Block Dismantling the ET 200 Both Screws Tightened in a Grounded Configuration Grounded Configuration for 24 V DC Digital Modules of the ET 200B Grounded Configuration for 120 230 V AC Digital Modules of thie ET 200B ids ces ae teer pere DET eee bee RF CET EN 3 19 Upper Screw Removed an Ungrounded Configuration 3 21 Ungrounded Configuration for 24 V DC Digital Modules of the ET 200B cese bate r RR FERE LA TERES Connecting Cables to Spring Latch Shield Connecting Element on Terminal Block TB8 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Digital ET 200 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B
78. Area Digital Module Order Number Consis tency Bytes ET 200B 16DI 6ES7 131 0 00 0 0 00 11 Bye 2 digital ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XB0 00 13 Byte 4 digital ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO pedes ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0BH00 0XB0 21 00 Bye 2 digital ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 132 0BH10 0XB0 21 00 Byte 2 digital ET 200B 32DO 6 87 132 0BLOO OXBO 23 00 Bye 4 digital ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BH00 0XB0 20 10 Bye 1 digital ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6ES7 133 0BH10 0XB0 21 10 Byte 2 1 digital ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6 87 133 0BL00 0XB0 21 Byte 2 2 digital ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BN00 0XB0 20 12 Bye 1 digital ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6ES7 133 0BN10 OXBO BB Ed ET 200B 8RO 6ES7 132 0GF00 0XBO 20 9 Bye digital ET 200B 16DI AC 6ES7 131 0 00 0 0 00 T Bye 2 digital ET 200B 16DO AC 6ES7 132 0HF00 0XBO ET 200B 16RO AC 6ES7 132 0 00 0 0 21 00 Byte 2 digital ET 200B 8DI SRO AC 6ES7 133 0 00 0 0 20 10 Bye 1 1 digital 95 200B Distributed I O Station B 2 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuration Telegram Structure for Ana The length of the configuration telegram for analog modules depends on the log Modules type of configuration The structure of the configuration telegrams for analog ET 200B modules is as follows Table B 3 Structure of the Configuration Telegram for
79. At 120 V 60 Hz e At 230 V 50 Hz Type of input acc to IEC 1131 Delay of inputs Connection of 2 wire BERO Permissible quiescent current Connection of mechanical switches Cable length 16 Yes optocouplers 4 120 230 V AC 0 to 40 V AC 79 to 264 V AC 3to 16 mA Typ 6 5 mA Typ 10 5 mA Type 1 0 to 25 ms No 2mA Yes Max 600 m 1968 ft 7 78 noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules 7 3 12 Electronics Block ET 200B 16DO AC 6ES7 132 0HF00 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 16DO AC electronics block has the following characteristics e 16 outputs floating in groups of 4 Output current 0 5 A Load voltage 120 230 V AC Possible terminal block TB6 AC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 22 for the precise dimensions ing
80. Connection 4 1 Connection 5 0 Connection 5 1 Q0 Connection 6 0 4 Q0 Connection 6 1 QO Connection 7 0 w EMEN N gt oj y 6 Q0 Connection 7 1 1 TBI 4 DC only ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c rper L2 not a supply internal logic L3 Voltage supply internal logic Terminal tier 3 Ground internally jumpered connected to M2 M3 Az ON not used 3 Ground connection internal logic M3 Ground connection internal logic 5 gt 1 BR BR wl wl Bl ol el os al ala Terminal tier 4 PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw 7 47 Digital Modules Important Note on Wiring Technical Data The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the ET 200B 8RO The terminals for PE on the 4 tier terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB1 4 DC MI 2 MG and terminals 33 48 are interconnected e The two L3 terminals are internally interconnected The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 8RO is listed in the tables below Technical specifications Relay outputs Baud rates Bus protocol SYNC capability Galvanic isolation to the SINEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dim
81. Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 7 to 24 iio kia ne p ex edu E Rex nee E 4 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4 812 6089 02c XI Contents Tables 1 1 200B Range of Applications 3 1 Assignment of the Electronics Blocks to the Coding Slide Switch 3 2 Approved Fuses for Terminal Blocks 3 3 Approved Conductor Cross sections 3 4 Pin Assignments of the Terminal Blocks 3 5 BUS GOMMGCLOMS PME here ech oe tye desta cee eis a 3 6 Pin Assignment of the PROFIBUS DP Interface 4 1 Type File Versions and Applications 5 1 LEDs on Digital ET 200B Modules and their Meanings 5 2 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings 5 3 Function Blocks for Slave Diagnostics 5 4 Structure of Station Status 1 Byte 0 5 5 Structure of Station Status 2 Byte 1 5 6 Structure of the Master Station Number Byte3 5 7 Structure of the Manufacturer ID Bytes 4 5 5 8 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics and Process Alarms 5 9 Possible Values for Byte 13 in Diagnostics Alarm 5 10 Bytes 17 to 28 for Dia
82. ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA _ ix0o 0 Input byte Output byte y Oy 0 Ix 7 uu o 0 m q 2 7 Enable Output byte 1 1 0 0 with cutoff level en Oy 1 0 0 tered per output Oy 1 7 IB x n OB y 1 n OB y n Output signal n 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 any 0 deactivated 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 any 0 deactivated ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 59 Digital Modules Note Fuse 7 60 The following notes are important as regards the wiring and hardware cutoff of ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA e The terminals for PE on the 4 tier terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB1 4 DC e L1 and L3 are not internally interconnected 3 terminals 17 32 are interconnected as are M2 and terminals 33 48 The two L3 terminals are also interconnected Outputs can switch through temporarily Warning The configuration described below is such that POWER OFF STOP or tran sient voltage collapse at the terminal block cause the outputs of the ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA to switch through briefly Case 3 in Table 7 11 Truth Table gray background cutoff level byte OB 1 programmed to 0 outputs set to 1 by 55 57 application program signal 1 at input I x n activates the hardware cut off Cause POWER OFF STOP or transient voltage collaps
83. ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 2 1 Technical Description 2 1 Design of the Terminal Block Design Principle of the Digital TBs 2 2 digital terminal blocks are built on the same design principle explained below using the TB1 DC terminal block as a typical example 10 1 STEMENS e 00200000 i 2 OOo Gal A o o o o o o o o n o n u i 4 113 A oooooooooooQoooQ E oooooooooooopooooooo g 220002000000002000000 8 2 3 193 0 10 0 0 PROFIBUS DP 7 6 5 4 Figure 2 1 The TB1 DC 5 0 310 Ui Coding slide switch Fuse STOP RUN switch not TB6 AC The power supply for logic circuits in the electronics block can be switched on or off with the STOP RUN switch It can also be used to switch the ET 200B distributed I O station on and off Terminals for power supplies Terminals for inputs outputs Slide for removing the terminal block from the standard sectional rail MA screw conn
84. Elevation ET 200B 8RO 6 57 132 0GF00 0XBO ET 200B Distributed Station 7 44 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 8RO and TB1 DC or TB3 DC ET 200B 8RO iV PROFIBUS DP 5 4V Logic 4 5V p Wc T i 1 r4 1 j CX UB J 0 X 1 L34 M x1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB3 DC number selection Suppr logic STOP RUN Connection switch PROFIBUS DP M Contact o EN EN L14L24L34 M e e e o Ground e PE Screw for grounding Relay 24V see Sec outputs supply Figure 7 36 Block Diagram ET 200B 8RO 6ES7 132 0GF00 0XBO and TB1 DC or TB3 DC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 45 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 8RO and TB1 4 DC ET 200B 8RO iV PROFIBUS DP 5V 4V L Logic 4 5V 1 i Y e sls X 0 XA L3
85. Figure 7 30 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 132 11 0 0 and TB2 DC or TB4 DC 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 33 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 16DO 2A and TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET 200B 16DO 2A 7V PROFIBUS DP 5V 4V gt Logic 4 gt 5V Wee __ E m Bos _ 26 2 00 00 Q1 Q1 L1 M1 0 3 L2 M2 4 7 L3 M3 0 3 _ L4 M4 4 7 5 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 4 DC Station number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN Suppr Suppr Suppr Suppr switch PROFIBUS DP logic logic logic logic L14M1 L24M2 L34MS3 14 4 L5 5 5 Out o d o o Supply o L o 9 Ground Z le o Screw for grounding Digital 24 V see Sec 3 4 outputs supply Figure 7 31 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 132 11 0 0 and TB2 4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station 7 34 EW
86. Files and GSD Files 32DO 8RO The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules 32DO 8RO 8DI 8DO and 8DI 8DO and 8DI ADO HWA 8DI 8DO HWA Table A 4 Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part 3 for ET 200B 32DO ET 200B 8RO ET 200B 8DI 8DO ET 200B 8DI 3DO HWA Characteristic DP Keyword to 32DO 8RO 8DI 8DO 8DI 5DO EN 50170 Part 3 HWA Manufacturer ID Ident Number 000 0003H 000Bg 0010g Supports 9 6 kbaud 9 6 supp Yes Supports 19 2 kbaud 19 2 supp Yes Supports 93 75 kbaud 93 75 supp Yes Supports 187 5 kbaud 187 5 supp Yes Supports 500 kbaud 500 supp Yes Supports 1 5 Mbaud 1 5M supp Yes Supports 3 Mbaud 3M supp Yes Supports 6 Mbaud 6M supp Yes Supports 12 Mbaud 12M supp Yes Supports FREEZE control Freeze Mode supp Yes Yes command Supports SYNC control Sync Mode supp Yes Yes Yes Yes command Supports autobaud search Auto Baud supp Yes Software settable station Set Slave Add supp No number Length of user specific data User Prm Data Len 5 Byte parameterization telegram User specific data parameterization telegram User Prm Data 00 00 00 00g 00 Modular station Modular Station No ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Type Files and GSD Files 1601 16 The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules 16DI 16DO 24DI 8DO and 24DI 8DO and 24DI 8DO 0 2 ms 24DI 8DO 0 2ms Table A 5 Characteristics according to EN 5
87. K L N T U Resistance thermometers Pt 100 Ni 100 Resistors 48 Q 150 Q 300 Q 600 Q Voltage sensors 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1000 mV 2 wire connection Measuring principle integrating Integration times 2 5 ms 16 7 ms 20 ms 100 ms e Supply voltage 24 V DC e Measured value range selection via COM ET 200 or STEP 7 or directly via parameterization telegram see Chapter 4 Dimensional Draw Dimensional drawing of the ET 200B 4 8AI ing 51 5 _ 150 _ 43 6 RUN 0 BF DIA co o ET 200B um 8 co co 0 1 2 E eo i T e AJ i iD B A LRI K __ X3 XA X 2X4X 3 X 1 AA co 1 Jt 1 K dae loko TW 134 0KH01 0XB0 Y 18 9 8 11 2 Figure 8 4 Dimensional Drawing ET 200B 4 8AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 20
88. Max 100 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Max 8 Hz Max 4A Max 6 5 A Max 5 W Max 10 W Possible L1 12 55 V Max 100 m 328 ft noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud 7 31 Digital Modules 7 3 4 Electronics Block ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 132 0BH11 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 16DO 2A electronics block has the following characteristics 16 outputs floating in groups of 4 Load voltage 24 V DC e Output current 2 A Possible terminal blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC TB4M DC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 22 or the precise dimensions ing C RUN O BF ODIA O L1 L2 L3 L4 ET 200B 1600 24 SIEMENS T 5 0 L4 o0 L4 L1 E L1 os 5 2 L3 6 O 2 L6 3 L3 3 r17 Q0 DC24V 2 Q1 DC24V 2 558 012 5 405 5 7 01 2 5 4A 5 7 TS Jd s d Lie 33 40 au 1 s 12 48 9 d B 1 49 56 7 d E 14457 64 15 LE 4 un
89. Q0 Connection 6 1 Q0 Connection 6 0 Q0 Connection 7 1 Q1 Connection 0 0 Q1 Connection 1 0 Q1 Connection 1 1 Q1 Connection 2 0 Q1 Connection 2 1 Q1 Connection 3 0 Q1 Connection 3 1 not used A N not used not used not used not used not used not used Q1 Connection 0 0 not used not used not used not used not used not used AB AI ISINI ej Of a 200B Distributed Station 7 86 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Table 7 16 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16RO AC 6ES7 132 0HH00 0XBO continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 59 QI Connection 7 0 9 notused 28 QI Connection 5 1 60 92 notused 0 i 94 i 3 95 i 96 not used 30 Q1 Connection 6 1 62 Q1 Connection 6 0 6 Q1 Connection 7 1 Be mE Voltage supply internal logic Voltage supply internal logic BS Voltage supply internal logic Voltage supply internal logic not used not used Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 16RO AC e Protect the module against inductive voltage surges at the relay contacts Suitable surge protectors are RC elements or varistors connected across the relay contact or across the load The size a
90. QI 0 7 2 For ET 200B 16DO 2A e Voltage is applied for channel groups QO 0 3 and QO 4 7 2 L34 L4 Lit green For ET 200B 32DO e Voltage is applied for channel groups Q2 0 7 and Q3 0 7 2 For ET 200B 16DO 2A e Voltage is applied for channel group Q1 0 3 and QI 4 7 2 Not applicable to AC 120 230 V AC digital modules These modules do not have a STOP RUN switch LED goes out if fuse blows or voltage drops below a certain limit typically 15 5 V ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 3 Status and Error Diagnostics Error Indication The meanings of the signals provided by the LEDs on analog ET 200B mod Analog ET 200B ules are listed in the table below Table 5 2 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings LED RUN LED BF LED DIA Meaning Remedy Off Voltage not applied to mod Check the power supply ule Check that the electronics block is correctly mounted on the terminal block Lit green Module is on the PROFI BUS DP and is exchanging data Lit green Lit red or off Lit red An error has occurred on the Read the diagnostics buffer module e g parameteriza to identify the error see tion incorrect wire break Section 3 Slave Diag measuring range overshot nostics If there is no diagnostics in formation in the buffer check parameterization to ascertain whether the diag nostics alarm and corre sponding channel
91. STOP RUN switch Connection PROFIBUS DP M Input 9 L14L24L34 M 2 Voltage sensor 4 9 7 Ground e e e PE Screw for grounding Digital 24 V see Sec 3 4 inputs supply Figure 7 20 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI 6ES7 131 0BH00 0XB0 and TB1 DC or TB3 DC 7 16 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 16DI and TB1 4 DC 200B 16DI X1 TB1 4 DC PROFIBUS DP ay 5V 4V gt Logic 4 2 5V 16x 10 0 7 11 0 7 L3 L34 M Interface between electronics block and terminal block Station number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN switch Connection PROFIBUS DP Input o a 09 9 9 L14L24L34 M M Voltage sensor e e e x 6 e 9 Ground e e e e PE e Screw for grounding Digital 24 V see Sec inputs supply Figure 7 21 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI 6ES7 131 0BH00 0XB0 and TB1 4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 17 Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 16DI For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the termina
92. TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET 200B 32DI 47 200B 32DI0 2ms PROFIBUS DP 5V 4V lt 5VNI 1 10 m 15 5 12 7 l I3 x1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 DC or Station 1 TB4 DC death Suppr logic selpelion STOP RUN switch Connection PROFIBUS DP L5 M5 M5 Out o olo o o 2 Voltage sensor l o BS Sll TN Ground 4 4 E 4 PE Screw for ground Digital 24V ing see 3 4 supply Figure 7 24 Block Diagram ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO or ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO and TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 21 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 32DI or ET 200B 32DI 0 2 ms and TB2 4 DC ET 200B 32DI ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms X1 TB2 4 DC PROFIBUS DP 4V 5V 4V 5V 2 0 7 82 11 0 7 12 0 7 Poo 13 0 7 T 1 Int
93. V Current consumption from L5 Logic e Sensors Typ 85 mA Max 1A lt 0 05 A s for inrush current Number of inputs 16 Galvanic isolation to inter nal electronic circuits Input voltage Rated value 24 V DC For 0 signal 30 5 For 1 signal 13 30 V ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Outputs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation e n groups of Output voltage For 0 signal For 1 signal Output current For 0 signal For 1 signal Delay of outputs From 0 to 1 From 1 to 0 Switching frequency e Resistive load Inductive load Lamp load Short circuit protection Load current per group e Total current Lamp load Setting a digital input Limit of inductive cutoff voltage Cable length 16 Yes Max 2 V idle Min supply voltage 3 V Max 1 mA 0 5 A Approx 20 us Max 0 5 ms Max 1000 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Max 8 Hz Yes 2 Max 5 W Possible Typ L1 L2 55 V Max 100 m 328 ft Tn operation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud 7 67 Digital Modules 7 3 10 Electronics Blocks ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0 01 0 0 and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6 57 133 0BN11 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 24DI 8DO and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms electronics blocks have the following characterist
94. Working error limit 0 60 Voltage ranges Current range Permissible input voltage destruction limit Permissible input current destruction limit Cable length Shielded 0 32 0 41 96 Max 30 V static or 75 V pulse for max lms and 1 20 sampling Max 24 mA Max 100 m ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 75 Analog Modules 8 6 Electronics Block ET 200B 4AO 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO Characteristics Dimensional Draw ing The ET 200 4 electronics block has the following characteristics 4 inputs floating to the supply voltage of the internal logic Output ranges Voltage output 10V 0 10 V Current output 20 mA 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Supply voltage 24 V DC Loads connectable in 4 wire connection 2 wire connection Output range selection via COM ET 200 or STEP 7 or directly via para meterization telegram see Chapter 4 See Figure 8 4 for the precise dimensions RUN DIA ET 200B a4o V
95. an 230 V AC system the following must always be con nected to the same outer conductor same phase 1L1 1N and 2L1 2N same phase 3L1 3N and 4L1 4N same phase e finstalled in an 230 V AC system with ambient temperatures in excess of 40 only 12 inputs can be used and rated input current must not ex ceed 240 V AC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 77 Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol Galvanic isolation to SINEC L2 DP Power losses at230V at120V Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 16DI AC is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes 500 V DC to logic 1500 V AC to connection terminals Typ 6 W Typ 4 5 W 811 g 29 oz 235 x 130 x 60 mm 9 17 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Diagnostics functions Voltage monitoring Bus monitoringSINEC L2 DP Status of inputs Supply voltage L1 Rated value Permissible range Frequency Current consumption from L1 Green RUN LED Red LED Green LEDs Supply voltage for internal logic 120 230 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz Typ 60 mA Number of inputs Galvanic isolation e n groups of Input voltage Rated value 0 signal For 1 signal Input current for 1 sig nal e
96. and Applications Parameterization COM ET 200 COM ET 200 Windows STEP 7 software V4 x V1 0 and higher as DP slave Master IM 308 B IM 308 C S7 M7 DP master ET 200B digital modules Type file SIxxxxTE 200 SIxxxxAE 200 or SIxxxxAE 200 or SIxxxxAX 200 SIxxxxAX 200 Parameterization no settings possible Configuration DP ID Diagnostics 13 bytes 13 bytes 13 bytes ET 200B analog modules Type file SIxxxxTE 200 SIxxxxAE 200 SIxxxxBE 200 SIxxxxBE 200 Parameterization 32 bytes 32 bytes 36 bytes 36 bytes KH format plain text with pick plain text with pick plain text with pick list list list Configuration extended DP ID extended DP ID single channel ad single channel ad dressing possible dressing possible Diagnostics 16 bytes 21 25 bytes 25 29 bytes 25 29 bytes These applications are taken into accountin Chapter 5 hrou gh8 importantinformation on the other applications is contained in the Appendix STEP 7 version 2 0 and higher for digital modules STEP 7 version 3 0 and higher for analog modules xxxx manufacturer ID of the ET 200B module see Section A 1 3 Analog modules with additional functions limit value alarm diagnostics alarm 4AO supporting dummy value out put other measuring ranges ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuration and Parameterization 4 3 Where to Find the Requisite Information COM ET 200 Win dows and STEP 7 COM ET 200 Win dows Old Type File
97. and Electrical Installatior Mounting the To mount the shield connecting element on a standard sectional rail Shield Connecting Element on a Stan dard Sectional Rail 1 Hang the shield connecting element on the standard sectional rail from below 1 and swing it back 2 2 Secure the shield connecting element on the standard sectional rail by tightening the screws 3 Figure 3 5 Mounting the Shield Connecting Element on the Standard Sectional Rail ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 7 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Mounting the Ter To mount the terminal block on the shield connecting element minal Block on the Shield Connecting Element Engage the terminal block in the brackets of the terminal connecting ele ment 1 2 Tighten the screws to secure the terminal block to the shield connecting element 2 Figure 3 6 Mounting the Terminal Block on the Shield Connecting Element 200B Distributed Station 3 8 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Setting the Coding In order to prevent the wrong electronics block being plugged in the terminal Slide Switch block has a coding slide switch see Sectio 2 1 Figurd 2 1 1 The coding switch can be engaged in 6 settings Each setting is assigned to a module class of the ET 200B distributed I O station Table 3 1 Assignment of the Electronics Blocks to th
98. can be connected We recommend the following compensating boxes for connection to the ET 200B 4 8AI e Compensating box type U with current stabilizer Reference junction with built in power supply unit 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Order Numbers The order numbers of the compensating boxes and the associated components can be found in the tables below Table 8 3 Compensating Box Type U with Current Stabilizer Accessories Weight Order Number Type U compensating box Reference temp 20 68 gt 0 mV 0 22 kg 7 7 oz C70153 A502 A1 0 C 32 F gt 0 mV 0 22 kg 7 7 oz C70153 A502 A5 Insert for type U compensating box as spare part and for installation in dis tribution boxes or similar Reference temp 20 68 gt 0 mV 0 09 kg 3 15 oz C70153 A502 B7 0 32 0 mV 0 09 kg 3 15 oz C70153 A502 B9 Current stabilizer for feeding a com pensating box for thermocouple Fe Cu Ni Ni Cr Ni Reference temp 20 68 gt 0 mV 0 25 kg 8 75 oz M55232 A1 0 C 32 gt 0 mV 0 25 kg 8 75 oz 55232 2 Table 8 4 Reference Junction with Built in Power Supply Unit Accessories Order Number Reference junction with built in power supply M72166 unit for busbar installation AA Auxiliary energy 220 V AC Bl 110 V AC B2 24 V AC B3 24 V DC B4 Connection to
99. coding plugs on the TB8 terminal block and by means of the COM 200 or STEP7 parameterization software Coding Plugs The coding plugs of the TB8 enable you to set the input circuit of the TB8 for analog value measurement of each individual channel of the ET 200B 4AI in accordance with the measured value sensor connected and the desired mode of measurement The possible settings of the coding plugs are A B C and D For details of the relationships between the settings of the coding plugs and the mode of measurement and the measured value sensors see Sectio Section 3 1 describes how to change the settings of the coding plugs Channel Some parameters of the ET 200B 4AI listed on the following pages apply only to individual channels Table 8 39 lists the assignment of TB8 terminals to channels Table 8 39 Assignment of Terminals to Channels Channel Terminals Channel 0 Terminals 0 1 0 2 Channel 1 Terminals 1 1 1 2 Channel 2 Terminals 2 1 2 2 Channel 3 Terminals 3 1 3 2 200B Distributed Station 8 62 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Parameters Table 8 40 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B 4AI with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 You can set these parameters for the ET 200B AAI if you use the type file SI8019BE 200 Table 8 40 Parameters for ET 200B 4AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 Diagnostics alarm Diagnostics alarm enable for module Disable Enable
100. connection of terminal block TB2 4 DC e Li L5 and M5 are not internally interconnected The two L5 terminals are internally interconnected 200B Distributed Station 7 36 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol SYNC capability Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 16DO 2A is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Max 7 W Approx 900 g 31 5 oz 235 x 130 x 60 mm 9 17 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Diagnostics functions Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring by channel group 00 01 Status of outputs Green RUN LED Red LED Red DIA LED Green LEDs L1 L2 QO 0 to 7 13 14 QI 0 to 7 Green LEDs Supply voltage for outputs load voltage supply and internal logic Supply voltage L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Rated value Permissible range Value att lt 0 5s Current consumption from L5 Logic Pt for inrush current Short circuit protection in case of polarity reversal L1 L2 L3 L4 of load voltage 24 V DC 18 5 to 30 2 V 35V 100 mA 0 05 A s No ET 200B
101. diagnos tics have been enabled Lit green Flashing red Either Check the configuration in the Module has not received DP master station number sta tion type a parameterization tele gram or telegram is in correct or Incorrect bus protocol Lit green Flashing red Lit red Error in configuration tele This error cannot occur if the gram correct type files are used Lit green Flashes once Module is powering up red Lit green Lit red No signifi Baud rate matching in prog Check the PROFIBUS DP cance ress connection Check the DP master ET 200B Distributed Station 5 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 Slave Diagnostics Definition Diagnostics means the detection and pinpointing of errors The layout of slave diagnostics is defined in standard EN 50170 Part 3 Slave diagnostics of the ET 200B are in compliance with this standard In this Section This section describes the structure of slave diagnostics for ET 200B In Section you will find on Page 5 3 1 General information on slave diagnostics operation with IM 308 C 5 3 2 General information on slave diagnostics operation with 5 8 S7 M7 DP masters STEP 7 or other PROFIBUS DP masters 5 3 3 Structure of slave diagnostics 5 3 4 Structure of station status 1 to 3 5 3 5 Structure of the master station number and the manufacturer ID 5 3 6 Structure of device related diagno
102. for inputs sensor supply and internal logic Supply logic L5 Rated value Permissible range e Value for t lt 0 5 s Current consumption from L5 Logic e Sensors Pt for inrush current 24 V DC 18 5 to 30 2 V 35 V Typ 70 mA Max 1 A lt 0 05 25 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Inputs Number of inputs Galvanic isolation to inter nal electronic circuits Input voltage Rated value For 0 signal For 1 signal Input current for 1 signal Delay of inputs for 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO Delay of inputs for 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO Connection of 2 wire BERO Quiescent current Connection of mechanical switches Cable length of sensors Unshielded 32 No 24 V DC 30Vto5 V 13 V to 30 V Typ 4 mA for 24 V Min 2 mA 3 ms 0 2 ms Possible lt 1 5 mA Possible Max 100 m 328 ft noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud 7 25 Digital Modules 7 3 3 Electronics Block ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0 01 0 0 Characteristics Dimensional Draw ing The ET 200B 16DO electronics block has the following characteristics See 16 outputs non floating Load voltage 24 V DC Output current 12 X 0 5A 4 X 2A Suitable for solenoid valves and DC contactors Possible terminal blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC TB3 DC Figure 7 18 or the precise dimensions RUN
103. line Measuring line 4 Measuring line 4 4 Measuring line Measuring line Measuring line M Analog ground MA A M Analog ground MA A L Voltage supply internal logic L Voltage supply internal logic M Voltage supply internal logic M Voltage supply internal logic 0 1 2 3 Note Certain additional settings must be made for the input circuit by means of the coding plugs of the TB8 The settings of the coding plugs are illustrated in Figures 8 6 to 8 14 200B Distributed Station 8 48 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Technical Data table below Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol Galvanic isolation to the SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 50 0 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Typically 2 W Approx 550 g 19 25 OZ 160 x 130 x 60 Diagnostics functions alarms Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics Alarms Limit value alarm Diagnostics alarm End of cycle alarm Green RUN LED Red BF LED Red DIA LED para meterizable Yes parameterizable channels 0 and 2 Yes parameterizable Yes parameterizable Supply voltage for inputs and internal logic Supply voltage L Rated value Permissible range Value for t lt 0 5 s Current consumption
104. on the shield connecting element after first mounting the shield connecting element on the standard sectional rail or a smooth surface wall see Sectio 2 Mount the metallic terminal elements see Section 3 1 on the bottom edge of the shield connecting element 1 and 2 3 Strip the ends of the signal lines 4 Secure the bare cable ends to the terminal elements 3 and 4 5 Connect the shield connecting element to the protective ground conductor PE The cross section of PE must be a minimum of 4 mm and a maxi mum of 10 mm 6 Connect the shield of the bus cable in such a way that the maximum bend radius when bent once 10 x do do outer diameter of the cable is not exceeded Figure 3 16 Shield Connecting Element on Terminal Block TB8 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 25 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior 3 6 Wiring the Bus Interface Bus Interface Bus Connector PROFIBUS DP In terface 3 26 The PROFIBUS DP bus connects to the terminal block by means of a bus connector There are a number of bus connectors for ET 200B Table 3 5 Bus Connectors max 12 Mbaud 6ES7 972 0BA10 0XA0 socket with programmer socket 6ES7 972 0BB10 0XA0 max 1 5 Mbaud without programmer 6ES7 972 0BA30 0XA0 without terminating resistor socket When inserted the installation height for the ET 200B module is not exceeded with this bus connector
105. shield connecting element Handling and heat dissipation For swiveling disengaging the electronics block 167 SIEMENS 200B t600 01 I 0000 0000 0000 0000 a 15 20 76 130 HHHHHHHHRHHHHRRHHHRRHRHHRHHHRHHHHRH 156 3 e 7 0 2501000000000 00100 OU Qo oooooooooooooooo9000 T81 0C 222222222002220222 1 oo A3 omo 7 0000000000000 o000000000000 oo0o0o000000000 DBDBmBampmauamg 136 160 31 9 Thin Figure 3 3 Clearances Required for Installation of the 4 8AI 4AI and 4AO Electronics Blocks with Shield Connecting Element ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Shield Connecting In the case of analog value processing we recommend that the cable shield Element for TB8 ing of the signal lines be connected directly at terminal block TB8 For this application you can hang the 8 onto a shield connecting element after fi
106. shows the clearances required for installation of the 16DI 16DO Block Digital 8DI 8DO 8DI 8DO HWA 8RO and 4 8AI 4AL 4AO electronics blocks without shield connecting element Handling and heat dissipation fe 15 20 62 For swiveling disengaging the electronics block Fu p 5858 Goa o000 E LIEIEIEI O L24 0000 SIEMENS EBHB EIGED n n n a oo000 8 EBBHHEHHHBHHHHHHEBEBEBHHHBHHHEH 156 3 5 T e 2o000000 00000000 amp c SIEMENS H ooopoo2oooocooocoooo0 e oooooooooooooo oo ooo 1 5 J 180 s s Figure 3 1 Clearances Required for Installation of the 16DI 16DO 8DI 8DO 8DI 8DO HWA 8RO and 4 8AI 4AI Electronics Blocks without Shield Connecting Element 200B Distributed Station 3 2 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Large Electronics Figure 3 2 shows the clearances required for installation of the 16DI AC Block 16DO AC 32DI 16DO 2A 32DO 16DI 16DO 24DI 8DO 16R
107. the combination of single channel addressing and parameterization of channel group 0 for resistance measurement Pt 100 Ni 100 R requires parameterization of the Upper lower limit values for channel 1 In all other cases i e module addressing and single channel addressingand parameterization of channel group 0 for other than resistance measurement Pt 100 Ni 100 you parameterize Upper lower limit values for channel 2 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 25 Analog Modules 8 4 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S5 Analog Value Rep If you operate the ET 200B 4 8AI with SIMATIC S5 you can utilize the ana resentation SI log value representation of SIMATIC 57 higher measured value resolution MATIC S7 max 14 bits sign See Section 8 4 5 for the measured value tables for ana log value representation in SIMATIC 57 Analog Value Rep Analog values can be represented in two data formats with the resentation SI ET 200B 4 8AI for SIMATIC 55 MATIC S5 e 12 bit complement of twos representation range 2048 to 2047 units e 11 bit amount and 1 bit sign range 2048 to 2047 units The Table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B 4AI Table 8 10 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 High Byte Low Byte pr Bit mmber e SI 211 210 29 28 27 26 2
108. to inter nal electronic circuits Galvanic isolation to volt age supply of internal logic Output ranges Voltage range Current ranges Connection type Load resistance Voltage output Load impedance for current output e Capacitive load Inductive load No Yes 10 10 V 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4to20mA 2 or 4 wire connection Min 3 3 kQ Max 300 Q Max 1 uF Max mH Outputs continued Data input format Overrange Conversion time Settling time e For resistive load For capacitive load e For inductive load Permissible potential dif ference e Ma to PE or M Crosstalk between outputs Working error limit over entire temperature range in relation to output range Voltage Current Basic error limit working error limit at 25 C 77 F in relation to output range Voltage Current Temperature error in rela tion to output range Linearity error in relation to output range Repeatability in steady state condition at 25 C 77 F in relation to output range Output ripple in relation to output range Voltage output Short circuit protec tion Short circuit current Current output e Idle voltage Cable length ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c e Shielded 11 bit complement of twos Approx 17 5 Approx 1 ms 0 1 ms 3 3 ms 0 5 ms Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 40 dB 0 5 96 1 0 2 96 0 3
109. 0 1 0 2 Channel 1 Terminals 1 1 1 2 Channel 3 Terminals 2 1 2 2 Channel 4 Terminals 3 1 3 2 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 83 Analog Modules Parameters Table 8 58 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200 4 with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 You can set these parameters for the ET 200B 4A0 if you use the type file SI8018BE 200 Table 8 58 Parameters for ET 200 4 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO Parameter Explanation Diagnostics alarm Diagnostics alarm enable for module Disable Diagnostics enable for channel 0 Diagnostics messages enabled sepa Disable Diagnostics enable for channel 1 T tely foreach channel Enable Diagnostics enable for channel 2 Diagnostics enable for channel 3 Output value and range for channel 0 Type and range of output defined sepa rately for each channel Output value and range for channel 1 For voltage output Output value and range for channel 2 For current output Output value and range for channel 3 Representation of output values Sets representation of the analog values SIMATIC S5 for module SIMATIC S7 Type of dummy value for channel 0 Defines the dummy value output for Parameterizable 421 l each channel in the event of commu nication interruption Type of dummy value for channel 1 Last value Type of dummy value for channel 2 Type of dummy value for channel 3 Dummy value for channel 0 Sets dummy value for each channel 0
110. 0 mm 6 24 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Diagnostics functions Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SI NEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring by group Status of outputs Green RUN LED Red BF LED Red DIA LED Green 11 L2 LEDs Green LEDs Supply voltage for outputs load voltage supply and internal logic Supply voltages LI L2 L34 Rated value Permissible range Value for t lt 0 5 s Current consumption from L3 Logic for inrush current Short circuit protection in case of polarity reversal L1 and L2 of load voltage 24 V DC 18 5 to 30 2 V 35V 80 mA 0 05 A s No ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Outputs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation e n groups of Output voltage For 0 signal For 1 signal Output voltage For 0 signal For 1 signal Delay of outputs e At max lamp load Switching frequency e Resistive load Inductive load Lamp load Load current per group Total current Incase of short circuit Lamp load e AtI 0 5A e AtI 2A Setting a digital input Limitation of voltage in duced on current interrup tion Cable length Max 2 V idle Min supply voltage 3 Max 1 mA Max 2 A 2 outputs per group 0 and 1 Max 0 5 A 6 outputs per group 2 to 7 Max ms Max 80 ms
111. 00 4 8 70 8 52 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Ranges 1 25 V 25V 5Vand 10V 8 70 8 53 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200 4 Measuring Range 20 MA 8 71 8 54 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4Al Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 8 55 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200 4 8 56 Possible Configurations for the Output Areas of ET 200B 4AO 8 57 Assignment of Terminals to Channels 8 58 Parameters for ET 200 4 ET 200B Distributed Station XIV EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Contents 8 59 Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern 6 57 135 0HF01 0XBO 8 85 8 60 Description of the Bits 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO0 8 85 8 61 Analog Output Signals of the ET 200B 4AO Value Ranges 10V 0 10 V 20 mA 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Complement of Twos 8 86 8 62 Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern for SIMATIC 57 and ET 200B 4AO 8 87 8 63 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AO Output Ranges 0 to 10
112. 00 with 2 wire connections floating ground measurement is shown below V V V 2 2 TB8 V V V lo3lo4 13 14 MAL K 10 1102 1 1 1 2 El F Tm 0 2 lo la A 24V Pt100 100 Vom lt 1V Max gt 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC a eut P PE Mexternal Figure 8 9 Connection of Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 with 2 Wire Connections Floating Ground Measurement Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage Vcw 1V must not be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to Ma 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Ground In the case of ground referenced measurement you must connect terminal Referenced Mea x 4 externally with analog ground Ma surement The connection of resistance thermometers Pt 100 with 2 wire connections ground referenced measurement is shown below ne V V V 03 04 1 3 1 4 MAL L K 01 02N 1 11 2 M Ext connection e v S
113. 00B and the load circuit requires no additional fuse 2 e Use a Siemens load power supply unit 3 in the 6EV1 series Catalog ET 1 for supplying the 24 V DC to the ET 200B If you connect another load power supply unit 24 V DC please note that the voltage must be in the range 20 to 30 V including ripple The load power supply unit must generate a functional low voltage with safe elec trical isolation in accordance with DIN VDE 0106 In the case of non sta bilized load power supply units you require a back up capacitor rating 200 uF per 1 A load current e A fuse 5 is required for fusing the supply voltage For both grounded and ungrounded configurations the PE terminal of the ET 200B must have a low impedance connection to the protective ground conductor or the cabinet ground machine parts core cross sec tion of PE min 4 mm and max 10 mm 6 e Provide an insulation monitoring circuit against ground with voltage li mitation in accordance with the regulations applying to the system for example DIN VDE 0160 7 The PROFIBUS DP interface of terminal blocks release 2 and later is ungrounded Warning The ungrounded configuration can be canceled out by grounded machine parts and grounded electrical equipment Example grounded sensor or a grounded actuator connects the PE to the reference potential M terminal of the controller 200B Distributed Station 3 20 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c
114. 0170 Part 3 for ET 200B 16DI 16DO ET 200B 24DI 8DO ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms Characteristic DP Keyword to 16DI 16DO 24D1 8DO 24D1 8DO EN 50170 Part 3 0 2ms Manufacturer ID Ident_Number 000 000 000 Supports 9 6 kbaud 9 6 supp Supports 93 75 kbaud 93 75 supp Supports 187 5 kbaud 187 5 supp Supports 1 5 Mbaud 1 5 supp Supports 3 Mbaud 3M supp Supports 12 Mbaud 12M supp Supports FREEZE control Freeze Mode supp command Supports SYNC control Sync Mode supp command Supports autobaud search Auto Baud supp Software settable station Set Slave Add supp number Length of user specific data User Prm Data Len 5 Byte parameterization telegram User specific data User Prm Data 00g 00 00 00g 00 parameterization telegram Modular station Modular Station No ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c A 7 Type Files and GSD Files 16DI AC 16DO AC 16RO AC and 8DI 8RO AC Table A 6 The table below lists the master data of the ET 200B modules 16DI AC 16DO AC 16RO AC and 8DI 8RO AC Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part 3 for ET 200B 16DI AC ET 200B 16DO AC ET 200B 16RO AC ET 200B 8DI SRO AC parameterization telegram User specific data parameterization telegram User Prm Data Characteristic DP Keyword to 16DI AC EN 50170 Part 3 AC Manufacturer ID Ident Number 00194 Supports 9 6 kbaud 9 6_supp Yes Supports 19 2 kbaud 19
115. 0B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 5 Analog Modules Terminal Number ing List of Subsec tions Figure 8 5 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the ET 200B 4 8AI pee lcd Dh A B X4 M AX X X2 X4 X 3 X 1 X zo 2 E TM gt A X Figure 8 5 Connection Diagram ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0KH01 0XBO The following aspects of the ET 200B 4 8AI are described below In Section you will find 8 4 1 Connecting transducers 8 4 2 Configuration options Ee Setting the operating mode Analog value representation operation with SIMATIC S5 8 4 5 Analog value representation operation with SIMATIC 57 Ec 8 4 6 Schematic circuit diagram terminal assignment and techni cal data ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 4 1 Connecting Transducers Possible Connec You can connect the following to the ET 200B 4 8AI electronics block Bons e Up to 8 thermocouples with compensating box e Up to 4 resistance thermometers in 2 wire or 4 wire connection e Up to 4 resistors in 2 wire or 4 wire connection e Up to 8 voltage sensors 2 wire connection Mixed configurations with different types of sensor are possible Channel Group A channel group consists of two channels set with the parameterization soft ware COM ET 200 or STEP 7 diagnosti
116. 1 Digital Modules Introduction The tables below provide an overview of the digital modules of ET 200B List of Electronics The following types of digital electronics block are available Blocks Table 7 1 ET 200B Digital Electronics Blocks ET 200B 16DI Inputs 16 x DC 24 V 3 ms ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms Inputs 32 x DC 24 V 0 2 ms ET 200B 16DO Outputs 16 x DC 24 V 0 5 A 2 A ET 200B 16DO 2A Outputs 16 DC 24 V 2 A ET 200B 32DO Outputs 32 x DC 24 V 0 5 A ET 200B 8DI 8DO Inputs 8 x DC 24 V 3 ms Outputs 8 DC 24 V 0 5 200B 8DI 3DO HWA _ Inputs 8 DC 24 V 3 ms Outputs 8 DC 24 V 0 5 shutdown ET 200B 16DI 16DO Inputs 16 x DC 24 V 3 ms Outputs 16 x DC 24 V 0 5 A ET 200B 24DI 8DO Inputs 24 x DC 24 V 3 ms Outputs 8 DC 24 V 0 5 A ET200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms Inputs 24 x DC 24 V 0 2 ms Outputs 8 DC 24 V 0 5 A ET 200B 8RO Outputs 8 REL DC 24 60 V ET 200B 16DI AC Inputs 16 x AC 120 230 V ET 200B 16DO AC Outputs 16 x AC 120 230 V 0 5 A ET 200B 16RO AC Outputs 16 REL AC 120 V DC 24 150 V ET 200B 8DI SRO AC Inputs 8 AC 120 230 V Outputs 8 REL AC 120 V DC 24 150 V ET 200B Distributed Station 7 2 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules List of Terminal The following types of digital terminal blocks are available Blocks Table 7 2 ET 200B Digital Terminal Blocks Terminal block TBI DC TB1 4 DC Des
117. 10 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Order Numbers Introduction If you require additional components for your ET 200B system or want to expand your PROFIBUS DP you will find the order numbers of the compo nents you need in this chapter In this Chapter The components are listed in two groups e 200B components e Accessories for PROFIBUS DP the entries are accompanied by refer ences to the various manuals for the PROFIBUS DP master and configu ration software Order numbers for ET 200B components Order numbers for PROFIBUS DP accessories ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c F 1 Order Numbers F 1 Electronic Blocks Table F 1 Order Numbers for ET 200B Components The following types of electronics block are available Order Numbers Electronics Blocks for ET 200B Electronics Block ET 200B 16DI ET 200B 32DI Order Number 6ES7 131 0BH00 0XBO 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO Description Inputs 16 x DC 24 V 3 ms Inputs 32 DC 24 V 3 ms ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms ET 200B 16DO ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO 6ES7 132 0BH01 0XBO 6ES7 132 0BH11 0XBO Inputs 32 x DC 24 V 0 2 ms Outputs 16 x DC 24 V 0 5 A 2 A Outputs 16 DC 24 2 A ET 200B 32DO ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 132 01 0 0 6ES7 133 0 01 0 0 Outputs 32 x DC 24 V 0 5 A Inputs Outputs 8 x DC 24 V 3 ms 8 x DC 24 V 0 5 200B 8DI oDO HWA ET 200B 16DI 16DO ET 200B
118. 104 F Lamp load Size of motor starter Parallel connection of 2 outputs Setting a digital input Cable length 16 Yes optocouplers 4 79 to 264 V AC Max L1 1 5 V Max L1 8 5 V Max 1 3 mA Max 20 ms No 10 Hz 0 5 Hz 1 Hz 0 5 A 0 35 A 0 35 A Max 25 W Max size 3 acc to NEMA Possible though not in order to increase power Possible Max 600 m 1968 ft 7 83 Digital Modules 7 3 13 Electronics Block ET 200B 16RO AC 6ES7 132 0HH00 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 16RO AC electronics block has the following characteristics e 16 outputs floating in groups of 1 e Load voltage 120 V AC 24 150 V DC Output current 4A for outputs 0 0 0 7 1 0 and 1 7 12 A for outputs 0 1 to 0 6 and 1 1 to 1 6 e Suitable for AC DC solenoid valves switches motor starters small power motors motors and lamps Possible terminal block TB6 AC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 22 for the precise dimensions ing
119. 13121110 9 1176 26 Overflow 1175 78 Overrange 1000 48 0 0 0 010 0 010 0 0 0 Nominal 01010 range 0 010 0 010 0 010 2049 80 04 250 12 500 24 1000 48 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0140 0 0 Overrange 2408 94 06 293 95 587 89 1175 78 1 0 1101001100 0 0 0 0 lt 2409 94 10 294 07 588 13 1176 26 1 0 110 100 10 1 1 1 0j O I1 Overflow ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 27 Analog Modules Table 8 13 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 Measur ing Ranges 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV and 1000 mV Amount and Sign Units Measured Value in mV SI Digitized Measured Value XIF OV Range 80 ia 2 1000 15 124131211109 8 7 6 5 43 2 9410 294 07 58813 1176 26 E 0010110100 flow 1175 78 10010110100 0 0 Over range 1000 48 1000 0 500 00 0 48 Range 0 00 0 48 500 00 1000 0 1000 48 1175 78 Note Bit 15 of the digitized measured value indicates the sign The following applies SI 0 positive value SI 1 negative value 200B Distributed Station 8 28 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Measuring The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Ranges Resis ues for the resistance measuring ranges 48 Q 150 Q 300 Q and 600 Q tance Measure ment Table 8 14 Represent
120. 18018 200 B 4AI 2 DP 518019 200 4 2 DP SI8018BE 200 SIxxxxBE 200 There are two type file version for configuring analog modules with COM ET 200 Windows SIxxxxAE 200 and SIxxxxBE 200 You can use either version The SIxxxxBE 200 version supports additional functions for analog modules alarms dummy value output for 4AO and additional measuring ranges The SIxxxxBE 200 version now also supports single channel addressing Installation The manuals on the software contain notes on installation Note The type files listed in Tables 1 and A 2 are valid for the modules de scribed in this manual order numbers are listed in Appendix F even if the type files contain the order numbers of predecessor modules ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c A 3 Type Files and GSD Files A 2 GSD Files of the ET 200B Modules GSD File You need a device master data file or GSD file to EN 50170 Part 3 to con nect ET 200B modules to DP masters which cannot process the type files e g DP masters from other vendors The GSD file contains the definitions of all slave specific characteristics Provision of GSD AII GSD files for ET 200B are available on a diskette which you can order Files quoting the following order number Diskette with GSD files 6ES7 190 1A4A00 0AA0 You can also fetch the GSD files by modem from the Interface Center the modem number to dial is Tel 49 0911
121. 193 OCB10 0XA0 32 channels screw terminals 3 tiers TB2 4 DC 6ES7 193 0 20 0 0 6ES7 193 0CA30 0XA0 16 channels spring latching terminals 6ES7 193 0CB30 0XA0 32 channels spring latching terminals TB4M DC 6ES7 193 0CE30 0XA0 32 channels spring latching terminals with 4th termi nal tier for extra ground connections TB6 AC GEST 193 0CC10 0XA0 6ES7 193 0CC10 0XA0 16 channels screw terminals 3 tiers TB8 analog E i E E 193 0CD40 0XAO0 4 8 channels spring latching terminals Labeling Strips You can order additional sets of labeling strips under the following order numbers Table F 3 Order Numbers Labeling Strips Labeling Strips for Order Number 16DI 16DO 8DI 8DO 8DI 3DO HWA 6ES7 193 0BB00 0XA0 32DI 32DI 0 2ms 32DO 16DI 16DO 6ES7 193 0BD00 0XA0 24DI 8DO 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 8RO 6ES7 193 0BA00 0XA0 16DO 2A 6ES7 193 0BC00 0XA0 16DI AC 16DO AC 16RO AC 8DI SRO 7 6ES7 193 0BF00 0XA0 4AO 10 6ES7 193 0BE00 0XA0 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c F 3 Order Numbers F2 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS DP Accessories Introduction This section contains a list of the order numbers for the PROFIBUS DP ac cessories you need for ET 200B It also contains lists of the various manuals that you may need depending on the PROFIBUS DP master in use Network Compo Table F 4 shows all the network components for the ET 200 distributed I O nents for ET 200 syste
122. 2 0BLO01 0XBO ET 200B 8RO 6 57 132 0GF00 0XBO0 ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6ES7 133 0BH10 0XBO ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 133 0BL00 0XBO0 ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BN01 0XB0 and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6ES7 133 0 11 0 0 ET 200B 16DI AC 6ES7 131 0 00 0 0 ET 200B 16DO AC 6ES7 132 0 00 0 0 7 3 14 ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC 6 57 133 00 0 0 7 89 ET 200B Distributed Station 7 14 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules 7 3 1 Electronics Block ET 200B 16DI GES7 131 0BH00 0XBO Characteristics Dimensional Draw ing The ET 200B 16DI electronics block has the following characteristics e 16 inputs non floating Input voltage 24 V DC e Suitable for switches and 2 3 wire proximity switches BEROs Possible terminal blocks TBI DC TB1 4 DC TB3 DC Dimensional drawing for ET 200B 16DI 51 5 180 43 6
123. 2 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC TBAM DC for ET 200B 16DI 16DO 7 13 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC and TB4 DC for ET 200B 24DI 8DO and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 7 14 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16DI AC 7 15 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16DO AC 7 16 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16RO AC 7 17 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC 8 1 Analog Electronics Blocks of ET 200B 8 2 Analog Terminal Block of ET 200B 8 3 Compensating Box Type U with Current Stabilizer 8 4 Reference Junction with Built in Power Supply Unit ET 200B Distributed Station XII EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Contents 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 21 8 22 8 23 8 24 8 25 8 26 8 27 8 28 Possible Configurations for the Input Areas of ET 200B 4 8Al with only Voltage Sensors and Thermocouples Connected Possible IDs for Configuring the Input Areas of ET 200B 4 8Al with only Thermal resistors and Resistors Connected Example for Configuring the Input Areas of ET 200B 4 8AI Assignment of Terminals to Channel Parameters for ET 200 4 8 6 57 134 0KH01 0XBO
124. 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41 EE 10 Input 0 24 sensor voltage Ground sensor volt PE internally jump 10 1 1 internally jumpered age internally jump ered but not con EXE connected to L5 ered connected to nected to PE screw 10 Input 2 M5 10 Input 3 10 Input 4 6 10 Input 5 10 Input 6 10 Input 7 Input 0 O Input 1 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 23 Digital Modules Table 7 4 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and TB4M DC for ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO and ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6ES7 131 10 0 0 continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41 I2 Input 7 24 V sensor voltage internally jumpered I3 Input 0 57 connected to L5 PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw I3 Input 1 I3 Input 2 I3 Input 3 I3 Input 4 I3 Input 5 13 Input 6 I3 Input 7 Voltage supply Ground connection PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw internal logic and internal logic and sensor voltage 24 V sensor voltage Voltage supply Ground connection internal logic and internal logic and sensor voltage 24 V sensor voltage 1 TB2 4 DC only in the TB4M DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections see Section 7 2 7 Important Note on The following notes a
125. 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BH10 0XBO 6ES7 133 0BL00 0XBO 6ES7 133 0 01 0 0 Inputs Outputs down Inputs Outputs Inputs 24 Outputs 8 8 x DC24 V 3 ms 8 x DC 24 V 0 5 A hardware shut 16 x DC24 V 3 ms 16 x DC24 V 0 5 A x DC 24 V 3 ms x DC 24 V 0 5 A ET200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms ET 200B 8RO ET 200B 16DI AC ET 200B 16DO AC ET 200B 16RO AC ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 133 0BN11 0XBO Inputs 24 x DC 24 V 0 2 ms Outputs 8 x DC 24 V 0 5 A 6ES7 132 0GF00 0XBO Outputs 8 REL DC 24 60 V 6ES7 131 0HF00 0XBO Inputs 16 x AC 120 230 V Outputs 16 x AC 120 230 V 0 5 A 6ES7 132 0HF00 0XBO 6ES7 132 0HH00 0XBO 6ES7 133 0HH00 0XBO 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Outputs 16 x REL AC 120 V DC 24 150 V Inputs Outputs 8 x AC 120 230 V 8 x REL AC 120 V DC 24 150 V 8 analog differential inputs or 4 x Pt 100 measuring principle integrating ET 200B 4AI ET 200 4 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 4 analog differential inputs Measuring principle successive approximation 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO 4 analog outputs ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Order Numbers Terminal Blocks The following types of terminal block are available Table F 2 Order Numbers Terminal Blocks for ET 200B Terminal Block Order Number Description TB1 4 DC 6ES7 193 0CA20 0XAO0 16 channels screw terminals 4 tiers TB2 DC 6ES7
126. 5 24 23 22 21 20 representation Bits 0 to 2 and bit 15 have no significance for the amount of the measured value See Table 8 11 for a detailed description of these bits Supplementary Bits 0 to 2 and bit 15 have the following meaning in the bit pattern of the Bits analog input value Table 8 11 Description of the Bits 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 Bit Meaning Signal Sta Meaning of the Signal Sta tus tus Overflow bit Overrange Fault bit Wire break the measured value read in is not valid Sign 4 sign sign Irrelevant In the event of an overflow at one measuring point the overflow bits of the other chan nels remain unaffected this means that the values of the other channels are correct and can be evaluated 2 When the ET 200B 4 8AI signals a wire break fault bit F 1 the overflow bit OV is also set 200B Distributed Station 8 26 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Voltage Measuring The two tables below show the assignments of analog to digitized measured Ranges values for the measuring ranges 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV and 1000 mV Table 8 12 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 Mea suring Ranges 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV and 1000 mV Complement of Twos Units Measured Value in mV Digitized Measured Value X F O Range V 80 250 500 1000 15 14
127. 5 0 9375 Nominal range 0 9375 1 25 1 25005 Underrange 1 4699 200 Distributed Station 8 70 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Current Measuring The two tables below show the representation of the digitized measuring val Ranges ues of the ET 200B 4AI for the measuring ranges 20 mA 0 20 mA and 4 20 mA Table 8 53 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Mea suring Range 20 mA Measuring Range Units 4 Range 23 518 32511 Overrange 20 0007 6 0 20 000 15 000 Nominal range 15 000 20 000 20 0007 Underrange 23 5185 lt 23 519 32768 8000H Underrun Table 8 54 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Mea suring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Measuring Measuring Range Range ok Ed Decimal Hexadecimal gt 23 5185 32767 Overflow 23 518 Overrange 20 0007 20 0006 20 000 15 000 Nominal range 0 000 0 0007 Underrange 3 5185 lt 3 5192 lt 1 1846 32768 8000g Underrun ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 71 Analog Modules 8 5 6 Block Diagram Terminal Assignment and Technical Data Schematic Circuit Simplified representation of potential for the ET 200B 4AI and TB8 Diagram ET 200B 4Al PROFIBUS DP uos BS
128. 5 V 5V 10 V Figures 8 17 and 8 18 show the two methods of connecting voltage sensors Figure 8 17 shows the 2 wire connection of voltage sensors floating ground measurement V V V AC 8 gt gt y y y K4 0 3 0 4 13 14 K 10 1102 412 MAM M A 2 Shield A 24V aU VcM lt 1V Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC MA Mexternal Figure 8 17 Two Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B 4AI Floating Ground Measurement Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage 1 V must not be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 55 Analog Modules Ground Referenced Mea surement X 3x 1 2 4 jm 8 56 The 2 wire connection of voltage sensors ground referenced measurement is shown below V V V V V V lo3lo4 13 14 ISIN K 10 1102 1 12 bP Shield y Shiels
129. 6 7 5 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB3 DC Spring Latch Terminal 7 6 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB3 DC Spring Latch Terminal 7 7 7 7 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB2 DC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier 7 8 7 8 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB2 DC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier 7 8 7 9 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB2 4 DC Screw Type Terminal 4 Tier 7 9 7 10 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB2 4 DC Screw Type Terminal 4 Tier 7 9 7 11 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB4 DC Spring Latch Terminal 7 10 7 12 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB4 DC Spring Latch Terminal 7 10 7 13 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB4M DC Spring Latch Terminal 7 14 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB4M DC Spring Latch Terminal 7 15 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB6 AC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier 7 12 7 16 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB6 AC Screw Type Terminal 3 Tier 7 17 Dimensional Drawing Side Elev
130. 8RO AC 6ES7 133 0HH00 0XBO Analog Modules 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 4 3 8 4 4 8 4 5 8 4 6 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 5 4 8 5 5 8 5 6 Analog Modules 8 2 Terminal Block TB8 6 57 193 0 040 Terminal Block TB8 and Bus Connector Electronics Block ET 200 4 8 GES7 134 0KH01 0XBO0 Connecting Transducers Configuration Options Setting the Operating Mode Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S5 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S7 Block Diagram Terminal Assignment and Technical Data Electronics Block ET 200 4 6 57 134 0 01 0 Connecting Transducers Configuration Options Setting the Operating Mode Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S5 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S7 Block Diagram Terminal Assignment and Technical Data ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Contents 8 6 Electronics Block ET 200 4 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO0
131. A 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules and Old Type Files E 2 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics Analog ET 200B Introduction Diagnostics Alarm Process Alarm Device Related Diagnostics Header Byte 6 The structure of device related diagnostics for configuring the analog mod ules with the type file SIXXxxAE 200 is described below In essence this section is comparable with Sectio 15 3 8 of this manual other information on slave diagnostics with the IM 308 C applies as de scribed in Sectiod 5above No ID related diagnostics are displayed for configuration with SIx 200 Analog modules configured with SIxxxxAE 200 do not support alarms diag nostics alarm process alarm The device related diagnostics for an analog ET 200B shows you the error reported by the ET 200B The header indicates the length of device related diagnostics see Figure 5 2 Note Chapter 8 contains a discussion of Supplementary Bits in the section deal ing with analog value representation these bits contain additional diagnos tics information The analog ET 200B modules contain the following information in the Header device related diagnostics byte 7 0 Bit Byte6 0 0 VV v E Length of device related diagnostics incl byte 6 134 19 Byte 4 8Al OFy 15 bytes 4Al 4AO Code for device related diagnostics Figure E 1 Structure of the Header
132. A 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 16DO 2A For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB2 4 DC by way of example Table 7 6 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and TB4M DC for ET 200B 16DO 2A 6ES7 132 11 0 0 Terminal numbering TB2 4 DC 1213 1415 6 7189 1001 12 3 M I5 16 17 18 19 21 21 22 23124 25 26 27 2812931 30 31 32 33 34 35 136 37 38 1321401 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 150151152 153 54 55 96 57 98 59 60 61 62 83 64 Lo L5 65 66 67 68 6E 70 71 72 73 4 75 76 77 78 79 80 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 189190 91 92 93 94 95 96 M5 MS S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Terminal tier 1 QO Output 2 not used not used Terminal tier 2 Voltage supply L1 for channel group QO 0 to 3 internally jumpered Terminal tier 3 Ground M1 for chan nel group QO 0 to 3 internally jumpered 5 6 7 QO Output 3 8 9 QO Output 4 10 not used 11 QO Output 5 12 not used 13 QO Output 6 14 not used 15 Q0 Output 7 not used 16 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Voltage supply L2 for channel group QO 4 to
133. A and TB1 DC or TB3 DC 200B 8DI 8DO 47 HWA PROFIBUS DP 5 4V p Logic 4 d 5V FIS Driver d 1 Exi 1 1 i 1 1 1 8x 8x QO 0 7 10 0 7 11 13 X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB1 DC or Station m TB3 DC number selection Suppr logic STOP RUN Connection switch PROFIBUS DP M Voltage bn S 5 iy blt sensor Ground T E 2 PE Screw for grounding 24V see Sec 3 4 Outputs Inputs supply Figure 7 42 Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6 57 133 0BH10 0XBO and TB1 DC or TB3 DC 7 56 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of potential for the ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA and TB1 4 DC ET 200B 8DI 8DO 47 PROFIBUS DP 5 4V p H Logic 4 5V TFI No ace AA Driver i 1 I 1 1 1
134. AO 4 Wire Connection of Loads for Voltage Output 2 Wire Connection of Loads for Voltage Output 2 Wire Connection of Loads for Current Output Block Diagram ET 200B 4AO and TB8 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram for Digital ET 200B modules Structure of the Parameterization Telegram for Analog ET 200B Modules Standard Part of the Parameterization Telegram Parameters for Status Parameters for Analog Input Modules 4 8Al Bytes 15 and 16 for Analog Input Modules 4 8 Bytes 22 and 35 for Analog Input Modules 4 8 4Al Parameters for Analog Output Module 4AO Bytes 15 and 16 for Analog Output Module 4AO Bytes 22 to 35 for Analog Output Module 4AO Structure of the Header Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET200B Structure of Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 7 to 15 RE Rx Structure of the Header Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET200B 4 E 3 Structure of
135. Ac AB AB V y V K 0 3 0 4 13 1 4 M L L K 10 1102 1 1 1 2 Shield M 4 A 24V L Ri _ Al lee Meas Meas transd transd UcM lt 1V Max A gt 75 DC 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC gt PE Ma Mexternal Figure 8 21 Connection of 2 Wire Measuring Transducer as Current Sensor Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage of the differential inputs to analog ground is Ucm 1V Avoid ground loops ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 59 Analog Modules 4 Wire Measuring Transducer x3x l 8 60 2 4 The figure below shows how to connect the 4 wire measuring transducer as current sensor or voltage sensor V V V AB AB Y V V K 0 30 4 1 31 4 MAL Ly K 0102 141112 Shield A 24V M _ Meas Meas L transd transd Ucm 1V Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC lt eut Ma Mexternal Sensor Figure 8 22 Connection of 4 Wire Measuring Transducer as Current Sensor or Voltage Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage of
136. Analog ET 200B Modules Slot Byte pe perpe epe ww e Slot 2 virtual only n 5 04 00 00 9B 40 Slot 3 virtual only n 10 04 00 00 8F Slots 4 to 11 input and output areas of analog module See Table B 4 15 n 20 n 50 IDs for Analog Table B 4 contains all IDs hexadecimal for the analog ET 200B modules ET 200B Table B 4 IDs for Analog ET 200B Modules Analog Module Or Slot Byte der No 6ES7 h E TS 3 id ET 200B 4 8AI Configuration for entire module 8AT 4 47 00 15 C5 Configuration by channels 1 AI to 8 4 43 40 00 15 C2 5to 43 40 00 95 C2 1 ET 200B 4AI Configuration for entire module 4 1 4 43 43 00 15 C4 Configuration by channels 1 AIto4 x 4 43 40 00 15 C2 5 to 43 40 00 95 C2 7 ET 200 4 Configuration for entire module 4 4 43 00 25 0 Configuration by channels 1 X AO to 4 x AO 4 40 00 25 DO 5 to 83 40 00 AS DO 7 nz15 slot4 n 50 slot 11 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c B 3 Configuration Telegram Example of a Con You want to configure an ET 200 4 with two output channels channels figuration Tele 0 1 gram The configuration telegram consists of 25 bytes as follows 04 00 00 AD C4 04 00 00 9B 40 04 00 00 8F CO 83 40 00 25 DO 83 40 00 A5 DO virtual virtual virtual 4AO ch
137. B 32DI ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 7 25 UL CSA certification ET 200B 32DO 7 43 ungrounded configuration 3 20 ET 200B 4 8AI ET 200 4 8 74 ET 200 4 8 91 W ET 200B 8DI 8DO 7 54 200B 16DI 16DO wire break analog output module 5 21 wiring Prim ODE terminal block ET 200B 16DO 2A 7 37 ET 200B 16DO AC ET 200B 16RO AC 7 88 ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC ET 200B 8RO terminal block 1 3 characteristics 1 5 definition TB3 DC 7 7 TB4 DC TB4M DC TB6 AC 7 12 TB8 analog 8 3 wiring ET 200B Distributed I O Station Index 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Siemens AG AUT E 148 Postfach 1963 D 92209 Amberg Federal Republic of Germany From Your Name Your Title Company Name Street City Zip Code Country Phone Please check any industry that applies to you Automotive Chemical Electrical Machinery Food Instrument and Control Nonelectrical Machinery uaua Petrochemical 200B Distributed Station X EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c HUGE du Pharmaceutical Plastic Pulp and Paper Textiles Transportation Other Remarks Form Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to Siemens Please give each of the followin
138. BERO Permissible quiescent current Connection of mechanical switches Cable length of sensors Cable length Relay outputs 8 Yes optocouplers 4 120 230 V AC 0 to 40 V AC 79 to 264 V AC 3to 16 mA Typ 6 5 mA Typ 10 5 mA Type 1 0 to 25 ms No 2mA Yes Max 600 m 1968 ft Number of outputs e High current Low current Galvanic isolation e n groups of Short circuit protection Relay type Output voltage Rated value Permissible range Continuous current I 2 0 0 0 7 6 0 1 to 0 6 Yes relays 1 Takamisawa NY 24W K 24 to 150 V DC 120 V AC 0 1 to 150 V DC 79 to 150 V AC Max 4A for high current points Max 2A for low current points 7 93 Digital Modules Relay outputs continued Switching capacity of con tacts High current points Resistive load 24 V DC 120 230 V AC 120 V DC Inductive load 24 V DC 120 230 V AC 120 V DC Low current points Resistive and inductive loads 24 V DC 120 230 V AC 120 V DC Switching cycles of con tacts acc to VDE 0660 Part 200 e DC 11 AC 15 Switching frequency Resistive load Inductive load Cable length Setting a digital input 7 94 0 to 40 C 60 C 32 to 104 F 140 F 4A 2A 0 2 0 2 A 2A 2A 0 2 A 0 2 A 0 to 40 C 60 C 3210 104 140 F 2A 1 02 02 100 x 106 gt 300 x 105 Max 10 Hz Max 2 Hz Max 600 m
139. BO continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 4 Input 4 24 V sensor voltage 93 Ground sensor volt PE internally jump Input 5 internally jumpered age internally jump ered but not con connected to L5 ered connected to nected to PE screw Input 6 Input 7 Voltage supply Ground connection PE internally jump internal logic and internal logic and ered but not con sensor voltage 24 V sensor voltage nected to PE screw L5 Voltage supply M5 Ground connection internal logic and internal logic and sensor voltage 24 V sensor voltage 1 TB2 4 DC only the TB4M DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections see Section 7 2 7 Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 16DI 16DO The terminals for PE on the 4 tier terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB2 4 DC e Ifall actuators are connected by two wire cables to the TB2 DC TB4 DC or TB2 4 DC connect the ground of an actuator and the supply for the reference potential per group by means of a DIN 46231 cable cleat e Llc 12 and L5 or M2 and 5 are not interconnected e 5 terminals 49 64 are interconnected as are M5 and terminals 81 96 The two L5 terminals are also internally interconnected Fuse The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 2 5 A
140. C Front Elevation ET 200B 16RO AC Block Diagram ET 200B 16RO AC and TB6 AC Front Elevation ET 200 8 8 Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC and 6 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TB8 Spring Latch Terminals Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB8 Spring Latch Terminals Dimensional Drawing Side Elevation with Bus Connectors 6ES7 972 0BA10 0XA0 and 6ES7 972 0 10 8 4 Dimensional Drawing ET 200 4 8 8 5 Connection Diagram ET 200B 4 8Al 8 6 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensating Box Floating Ground 8 11 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box per Channel Floating Ground Measurement 8 12 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box Ground Refer enced Measurement Connection of Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 with 2 Wire Connections Floating Ground Measurement Connection of Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 with 2 Wire Connections Ground Referenced Measurement 8 15 Connection of Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 with 4 Wire Connections Floating Ground Measure
141. DI 8DO or ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2 ms and TB2 4 DC ET200B 24DI 8DO AV ET200B 24DI 8DO PROFIBUS DP 0 2ms 5V 4V p Logic 9 5y n 15 Fin EZ SEM Driveri 01 10 07 11 0 7 8x 24 12 0 7 QO m gt 5 5 L14 1 10 7 X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 4 DC Station 1 number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN Suppr switch Connection logic PROFIBUS DP yore MI 4 5 L5 M5 M o H B c oll o le e Voltage sensor P Ground 9 4 o 4 g 9 4 oHe e e PE Screw for grounding Digital Digital 24 V see 3 4 outputs inputs supply Figure 7 49 Block Diagram ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BN01 0XB0 or ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6 57 133 11 0 0 and TB2 4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station 7 70 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for 200B 24DI 8DO and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2 ms For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks takin
142. Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Outputs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation e n groups of Output voltage For 0 signal For 1 signal Output For 0 signal For 1 signal Delay of outputs e At max lamp load Switching frequency e Resistive load e Inductive load Lamp load Load current per group Total current Incase of short circuit Lamp load Setting a digital input Limit of inductive cutoff voltage Cable length is 1500 kbaud 16 Yes Max 2 V idle Min supply voltage 3V Max 1 mA Max 2A Max 1 ms Max 80 ms Max 100 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Max 8 Hz Max 4A Max 6 5 A Max 10W Possible 11 L4 50 V Max 100 m 328 ft Inoperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate 7 37 Digital Modules 7 3 5 X Electronics Block ET 200B 32DO 6ES7 132 0BL01 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 32DO electronics block has the following characteristics 32 outputs floating in groups of 8 Load voltage 24 V DC e Output voltage 0 5 A e Suitable for solenoid valves and DC contactors Possible terminal blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC TB4M DC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 22 or the precise dimensions ing RUN L1 BF ODIA O L1 L2 O L3 L4 200B s200
143. E 0 0 0 1 01011 Overflow Overrange Nominal range oc oc c oc oco co oc O oc oc oco Accuracy z2K oc oO oc oOc oc c c ocio Overrange Overflow 1 2 8 34 Wire break 5 99 9 9 E For a reference temperature of 0 32 F In the overrange any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Measuring Range The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Type L Thermo ues for Type L thermocouples couples Table 8 20 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type L Ther mocouples Iron Copper Nickel Constantan to DIN 43710 Complement of Twos Units Thermal Tempera Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range e m f ture in mv 15141312 11109 8 76 543 001010101000 1 Overflow Overrange Nominal range Overrange 1110111011 1 1 0 0 1 Overflow X XXXXXXXXXXXXX 0 Wire break For a reference temperature of 0 C 32 F 2 n the overrange any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 35 Analog Modules Measuring Range Type N Thermo The table below shows
144. Galvanic isolation to inter nal electronics Galvanic isolation to volt age supply of internal logic Measured value ranges Voltage sensors Current sensors Connection of signal sensors For voltage measure ment For current measure ment For measuring trans ducer Input resistance Voltage measurement Current measurement Measured value represen tation e SIMATIC S5 e SIMATIC 57 Measuring principle Conversion time Cycle time of module Permissible potential dif ference Across inputs of a channel Inputs to MA Ucm MAtoPEor M 1 25 V 25 5V 10V 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA Possible 2 wire connection Possible 2 wire connection Possible 2 wire and 4 wire measuring trans ducers 100 125 Q 12 bit complement of twos or 11 bit amount with sign or 12 bit binary select able Max 14 bit complement of twos depends on in tegration time Successive approximation Max 100 us Approx 5 ms Max 10 V Max 1V Max 75 V DC 60 V AC Error message in the event of Range overshoot nominal range Wire break of signal sensor lines ET Yes Only for measuring range 4 20 mA 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Inputs continued Noise suppression for f 2 n x 50 60Hz 1 n 1 2 e Common mode inter ference Uss lt 1 V Basic error limit Voltage ranges Current range
145. Groups C 2 Codings for the Integration Times of the 4 8Al C 3 Codings for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules C 4 Assignment of Terminals to Channels C 5 Codings for Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module D 1 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings D 2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B Operation with IM 308 B D 3 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Operation with 308 B D 4 Diagnostics Data Bytes 9 12 0 5 Possible Values for 9 D 6 Diagnostics Data Bytes 13 15 0 7 IDS for ET 2008 de dees deans 0 8 Content Meanings of the Bytes the Parameterization Telegram E 1 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings E 2 Diagnostics Data Bytes 9 12 E 3 Possible Values for 9 E 4 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics Alarm E 5 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input Analog Output Channel E 6 Possible IDs for Configuring Input and Output and Are
146. Limit value alarm Limit value alarm enable for module Disable Enable Diagnostics messages enabled sepa rately for each channel Diagnostics enable for channel 3 Wire break monitoring enable for Wire break monitoring enabled sepa channel 0 rately for each channel group for mea suring range 4 20 mA Wire break monitoring enable for channel 1 Wire break monitoring enable for channel 2 Wire break monitoring enable for channel 3 Measurement type and range for chan You can set the measurement type and Channel not activated nel 0 range separately for each channel For voltage measurement 10V Measuring type and range for channel 1 5V 25 Measuring type and range for channel 2 For current measurement 20 Measuring type and range for channel 3 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Representation of measured values Sets representation of the analog mea SIMATIC S5 sured values for module SIMATIC S7 Measured value representation S5 Sets data format for analog value repre Complement of twos sentation SIMATIC S5 Amount with sign Binary ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 63 Analog Modules Table 8 40 Parameters for ET 200B 4AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 continued Parameter Upper limit value for channel 0 Lower limit value for channel 0 Upper limit value for channel 2 Lower limit value for channel 2 Explanation Value Range Upper and l
147. M Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB1 4 DC Station number Su ppr logic selection STOP RUN Connection switch PROFIBUS DP M Contact 9 L12L24L34 M G 9 Ground e e e e e e PE e e e o ds Screw for grounding Relay 24V see Sec 34 outputs supply Figure 7 37 Block Diagram ET 200B 8RO 6ES7 132 0GF00 0XBO and TB1 4 DC ET 200B Distributed Station 7 46 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 8RO For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal num bering of the terminal blocks taking the TB1 4 DC by way of example Table 7 8 6ES7 132 0GF00 0XB0 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 8RO Terminal numbering TB1 4 DC E Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Q0 Connection 0 0 Q0 Connection 0 1 not used internally jumpered Q0 Connection 1 0 o QO Connection 1 1 0 Connection 2 0 Connection 2 1 Connection 3 0 Connection 3 1 Connection 4 0
148. NEB 812 6089 02c 7 91 Digital Modules Table 7 17 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC 6ES7 133 0HH00 0XBO continued Terminal tier 1 00 Output 4 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 00 Output 4 0 00 Output 5 1 00 Output 5 0 00 Output 6 1 00 Output 6 0 00 Output 7 1 Important Note on Wiring 7 92 58 00 Output 7 0 90 not used 59 9 not used 92 not used 61 93 not used 94 not used 63 95 not used 96 not used L1 Voltage supply internal logic N Voltage supply internal logic L1 Voltage supply internal logic N Voltage supply internal logic The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC If installed in an 230 V AC system with ambient temperatures in excess of 40 only 6 inputs can be used and rated input current must not ex ceed AC 240 V If installed in an 230 V AC system the following must always be con nected to the same outer conductor same phase 1L1 1N and 2L1 2N same phase 3L1 3N and 4L1 4N same phase Protect the module against inductive voltage surges at the relay contacts Suitable surge protectors are RC elements or varistors connected across the relay contact or across the load The size and ratings of the protective elements must be dimensioned to suit the size and type of load Voltage surge protectors of this kind extend the service life of the rela
149. Ncon e o e e oje ductor d e Screw for ground Relay 120 230 V PE ing see Sec outputs AC supply Figure 7 55 Block Diagram ET 200B 16RO AC 6 57 132 0HH00 0XBO and TB6 AC ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 85 Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 16RO AC For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB6 AC by way of example Table 7 16 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16RO AC 6ES7 132 0HH00 0XBO Terminal numbering TB6 AC 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 8101 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22123 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46147 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62163 6411 LI 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 T7 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 N N Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Q0 Connection 0 1 Q0 Connection 1 0 Q0 Connection 1 1 Q0 Connection 2 0 Q0 Connection 2 1 not used Q0 Connection 3 0 Q0 Connection 3 1 not used Q0 Connection 0 0 not used not used not used gt A 95 not used o2 oo not used not used Q0 Connection 7 0 not used not used Q0 Connection 4 1 Q0 Connection 4 0 00 Connection 5 1 Q0 Connection 5 0
150. Nevertheless make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in the technical data for the electronics block 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 53 Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol FREEZE and SYNC capa bility Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD Diagnostics functions The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 8DI 8DO is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Max 3 8 W Approx 650 g 22 75 oz 160 x 130 x 60 mm 6 24 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Inputs continued Input current for 1 signal Typ 4 mA at 24 V Delay of inputs Connection of 2 wire BERO Quiescent current Connection of mechanical switches Cable length of sensors Unshielded Min 2 mA 3ms Possible 5 mA Possible Max 100 m 328 ft Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring Status of inputs and out puts and internal logic Supply voltage L1 L3 Green RUN LED Red BF LED Red DIA LED Green L1 LED Green LEDs Supply voltage for sensor supply load voltage supply 7 54 Rated value 24 V DC Permissible range 18 5 to 30 2 V e Value for t
151. O 6ES7 132 0BLO1 0XBO 035 4 digital ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BHO1 0XBO 8DA or 032 BDEor 016 Byte 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6ES7 133 0BH10 0XBO 8DE or 016 Byte ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 132 0 1 00 0 0 017 Byte ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BNO1 0XBO 8DA or032 018 Bye 1 3 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BN11 0XBO 0 2ms ET 200B 8RO 6ES7 132 0GF00 0XBO 000 Byte E ET 200B 16DI AC 6ES7 131 0HF00 0XBO 000 017 Byte 2 ET 200B 16DO AC 6ES7 132 0HF00 0XBO 033 000 Byte 2 ET 200B 16RO AC 6ES7 132 0 00 0 0 000 Byte 200B 8DI 8RO AC 6 57 133 0 00 0 0 8DA or 032 8DE 016 Byte ET 200B 4 8AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 7 200B 4AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 4AE or 083 We ET 200 4 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO 099 Word 8 analog ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c D 11 Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x D 4 Setting the Operating Mode with COM 200 V4 x Introduction Structure for Digi tal Modules Structure for Ana log Modules Defaults and Structure of the Parameterization Telegram The structure of the parameterization telegram for configuring with COM 200 V4 x is described below In the case of digital ET 200B modules no settings can be made by means of the parameterization telegram When you open the DP Slave Parameteriza tion Telegram dialog box 5 bytes are assigned 00g by default Note In the cas
152. O AC and 8DI 8RO AC electronics blocks Handling and heat dissipation For swiveling disengaging the electronics block 5 20 200B 3200 SIEMENS 00 01 02 45 C3 n a a n a n a a K o a o o EI o a a H 2 o o o o o o a o zl o E a 130 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHRHHRHHH ml 156 3 F1 RUN STOP 0 0000 ooocoooooclococlooc C s SoS DIEI 8 SIEMENS oooooocoooooo oo 20202022000000000 2 288802002 2012020 0 28012200 00 200 2020120 9 Figure 3 2 Clearances Required for Installation of the 16DI AC 16DO AC 32DI 16DO 2A 32DO 16DI 16DO 24DI 8DO 16RO AC and 8DI 8RO AC Electronics Blocks ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Small Electronics Block Analog Figure 3 3 shows the clearances required for installation of the 4 8 4 4AO electronics blocks with
153. ROFIBUS DP Suppr logic STOP RUN switch M Ou N Groun L IK L34 M o O Ey e e PE Screw for grounding 24V see Sec 3 4 supply Figure 7 27 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0 01 0 0 and TB1 DC or TB3 DC ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 27 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 16DO and TB1 4 DC ET 200B 16DO TB1 4 DC X1 PROFIBUS DP ic Supply QO 0 7 Q1 0 7 L1 L2 L3 M Interface between electronics block and terminal block Station Suppr logic number STOP RUN selection switch Connection PROFIBUS DP Out EID 5 m o amp 9 LtaL24 L34 M M e 9 s 2 Ground gt 7 e e i3 PE e e e o PE Screw for Q grounding Digital 4 24 V see Sec 3 4 outputs supply Figure 7 28 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0BH01 0XBO and TB1 4 DC 7 28 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 16DO For the sake of clarity the table also sho
154. Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern for SIMATIC 57 and ET 200B 4 8AI High Byte Low Byte enm ee Nin SI 214 2 3 2 2 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2 20 Representation Bit 15 has no significance for the amount of the measured value It merely represents the sign Resolution The resolution for the measured value depends directly on the integration time selected for the ET 200B 4 8A In other words the longer the integra tion time for an analog input channel the higher is the resolution of the mea sured value If the resolution of an analog module is less than 15 bits the analog value entry is left aligned The unused lower value places are padded with 707 Table 8 25 lists the possible resolutions of the ET 200 4 8 as a function of integration time The x characters indicate the bits that are of no signifi cance for the measured value Table 8 25 Possible Resolutions of Analog Values ET 200B 4 8AI Integration Time Analog Value Resolution in Bits High Byte Low Byte 16 7 ms 20 ms 12 51 SI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 050 0 Q T xXx 100 ms 14 50 510000000 0000001 200 Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 39 Analog Modules Voltage Measuring The table below shows the representation of the digitized measuring values Ranges of the ET 200B 4 8AI for the measuring
155. S connected to x 1 Sensor line S connected to x 2 Analog ground MA Analog ground MA Voltage supply for internal logic Voltage supply for internal logic Voltage supply for internal logic Voltage supply for internal logic 0 1 2 3 Note You must make additional settings for the input circuits of the 8 via cod ing plugs See Figures 8 25 and 8 27 for the necessary settings of the coding plugs ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD The technical data of the ET200B 4A0 electronics block are listed in the table below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Typically 2 4 W Approx 550 g 19 25 oz 160 x 130 x 60 mm 6 24 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Diagnostics functions alarms Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics Diagnostics alarm Green RUN LED Red BF LED Red DIA LED parame terizable Yes parameterizable Supply voltage for outputs and internal logic Supply voltage L Rated value Permissible range Value fort lt 0 55 Current consumption from L Logic 24 V DC 18 5 to 30 2 V 35V Max 200 mA Outputs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation
156. SIEMENS SIMATIC ET 200B Distributed Station Manual EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Edition 04 Preface ontents Part 1 User information System Overview Technical Description Mechanical and Electrical Installation Configuration and A Parameterization Status and Error Diagnostics Part 2 Reference information General Technical Specifications Digital Modules Analog Modules Appendices Type Files and GSD Files Configuration Telegram Parameterization Telegram Configuring with D COM 200 V4 x Analog Modules and Old Type E Files Order Numbers Glossary Index Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to protect the product and connected equipment These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger Danger precautions are not taken indicates that death severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper Warning precautions are not taken indicates that death severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper Caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can resultif proper precautions are not taken Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product
157. Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 85 Analog Modules Voltage and Cur The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized output signals rent Output for the value ranges 10 V 0 10 V 20 mA 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Ranges Table 8 61 Analog Output Signals of the ET 200 4 Value Ranges 10 V 0 10 V 20 mA 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Complement of Twos Units Output Value in mV Digitized Output Value Range 1514131211109 8 7 6 23 52 11 758 11 758 20 0195 10 0098 10 0098 1025 0 0 0 0 20 02 0 0 10 00 1 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over range 1204 0 0 0 0 23 52 0 0 11 758 1 0 1 10 100 110 0 ET 200B Distributed Station 8 86 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 6 5 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC 57 Analog Value Rep Analog values are represented in complements of twos with the resentation Sl ET 200B 4A0 for SIMATIC S7 MATIC S7 The table below shows the analog value representation ET 200B 4AO Table 8 62 Representation of an Analog Output Value as a Bit Pattern for SIMATIC 57 and ET 200B 4AO High Byte Low Byte Bit EFE NES Analog value representation Bit 15 has no significance for the amount of the output value It merely repre sents the sign Voltage Output The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized output signals Ranges for the value ranges 10 V 0 10 V Table 8 63 Represen
158. T 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics In this Chapter This chapter describes the diagnostics options for the ET 200B distributed I O station The information is applicable if you are using the latest applicable type file under COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 see Table 4 1 gray fields Possible response on startup Status and error indication by LEDs Diagnostics with Diagnostics with the IM 308 B master interface and COM ET 200 4 is not IM 308 B discussed in this chapter You will find all the information you need on diag nostics with the IM 308 B in Appendix D Diagnostics with If you configure the analog modules of ET 200B with COM ET 200 Win IM 308 C Old Type dows and the type file SIxxxxAE 200 you will find the information you need Files on diagnostics in Appendix 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 1 Status and Error Diagnostics 5 1 Possible Response on Startup Response to If power is switched on and off repeatedly it is possible in exceptional cases Power Off Power that an ET 200B digital module will not be accepted by the PROFIBUS DP On bus Remedy Set the STOP RUN switch to STOP and then back to RUN Baud Rate Change With the ET 200B digital modules it is not possible to correct a wrong con figuration and simultaneously change the baud rate If this is attempted the station will not be accepted by the PROFIBUS DP bus Reme
159. V L HH x 1K 2 Ma M L Interface between electronics block and terminal block Station number Suppr logic selection Coding panels STOP RUN h switch Connection PROFIBUS DP k lo 3 o 4 1 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 3 3 3 4 Ant L K 0 1 0 2 41 11 212 42 12 2 3 13 2 M M NER PE Channel Channel Channel Channel Analog 24 V 0 1 2 3 ground supply Figure 8 28 Block Diagram ET 200 4 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO and TB8 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 89 Analog Modules Terminal Assign ment 8 90 The table below contains the terminal assignments of the TB8 for ET 200 4 depending on the circuit type used Table 8 65 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200B 4AO 6 57 135 0HF01 0XBO Terminal num per bering TB8 oio oio DN Pr T d 5 7 a A 5 1 5 7 5 5 7 rua Terminal 4 Wire Connection 2 Wire Connection Unassigned Analog output voltage Analog output current or voltage Analog output voltage Analog output current or voltage Sensor line
160. V and 10 8 87 8 64 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AO Output Ranges 20 mA 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 8 65 Terminal Assignment of the TB8 for ET 200 4 A 1 Designations of Type Files for Digital Modules A 2 Designations of Type Files for Analog Modules A 3 Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part 3 for 200B 16DI ET 200B 32DI ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 200B 16DO ET 200B 16DO 2A A 5 A 4 Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part 3 for ET 200B 32DO ET 200B 8RO ET 200B 8DI 8DO 200B 8DI 8DO HWA A 5 Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part for ET 200B 16DI 16DO ET 200B 24DI 8DO ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms A 7 A 6 Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part 3 for ET 200B 16DI AC ET 200B 16DO AC ET 200B 16RO AC ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC A 8 A 7 Characteristics according to EN 50170 Part 3 for ET 200B 4 8Al 200B 4Al 200 4 B 1 Structure of the Configuration Telegram for Digital ET 200B Modules B 2 IDs for Digital ET 200B Modules B 3 Structure of the Configuration Telegram for Analog ET 200B Modules B 4 IDs for Analog ET 200B Modules C 1 Assignment of Terminals to Channel
161. alog value representation SIMATIC 57 analog value representation SIMATIC S5 8 65 65 block diagram 8 72 characteristics 8 51 connecting transducers parameters possible IDs technical data terminal assignment ET 200 4 analog value representation SIMATIC 57 rmi 87 analog value representation SIMATIC 55 block diagram characteristics 8 76 connecting loads parameters possible IDs technical data terminal assignment ET 200B 8DI 8DO block diagram characteristics T pin assignment 7 52 technical data 7 54 ET 200B 22 7 90 block diagram characteristics 7 89 pin assignment 7 91 technical data 7 93 ET 200B 8RO block diagram characteristics pin assignment technical data ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Index ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA block diagram 7 56 7 characteristics HW cutoff pin assignment technical data 7 61 external error F feed current monitoring analog output module FM certification fuse 3 11 approved changing 3 11 order numbers G grounded configuration 3 17 GSD file A 4 ID ET 200B 4 8AI ET 200B 4AI ET 200 4 ID related diagnostics analog ET 200B 5 16 5 16 IDs config ie telegram B 2 308 B D 1 electronics block terminal block internal error L LEDs for diagnostics 5 3 M short circu
162. ameterization Telegram for Digital ET 200B modules In the case of analog ET 200B modules you can use the parameterization telegram to define diagnostics response and set the defaults for analog value measurement or analog value output as applicable Structure of the parameterization telegram for analog ET 200B modules is as follows Standard part 7 bytes See Section C 2 Parameters for status 3 bytes See Sectio Parameters for analog modules 26 bytes See Sections 4 anc C 5 Figure C 2 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram for Analog ET 200B Modules 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Parameterization Telegram C 2 Standard Part of the Parameterization Telegram Standard Part The first 7 bytes of the parameterization telegram are standardized to EN 50170 Part 3 and their contents could be as follows Byte 0 08y Station status Byte1 014 Watchdog factor 1 Byte 2 06 Watchdog factor 2 Byte 3 OBy Response delay Trapy Byte 4 80H Manufacturer ID high byte Byte5 1Dy Manufacturer ID low byte Byte 6 00H Group ID Figure C 3 Standard Part of the Parameterization Telegram 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c C 3 Parameterization Telegram C 3 Parameters for Status Parameters for Status C4 The next 3 bytes contain the status bytes The meanings of the parameters are desc
163. annel 0 channel 1 slot 1 slot 2 slot 3 slot 4 slot 5 ET 200B Distributed Station B 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Parameterization Telegram Applicability If you use configuration software such as COM ET 200 or STEP 7 you can ignore this chapter In this Chapter If you parameterize ET 200B modules via a parameterization telegram for example with CP 5431 as DP master you can consult this chapter for details of how to structure the parameterization telegram for the various types of ET 200B module Section Describes Page C 2 Standard part of the parameterization telegram C 3 Parameters for status C4 Parameters for analog input modules C5 Parameters for analog output module C 10 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c C 1 Parameterization Telegram C 1 Structure of the Parameterization Telegram Definition Para meterization Tele gram Structure for Digi tal Modules Structure for Ana log Modules 2 the parameterizable values of the ET 200B are stored in the parameteriza tion telegram No settings can be made for digital ET 200B modules via the parameteriza tion telegram 5 bytes must contain 00g by default The structure of the parameterization telegrams for digital ET 200B modules is as follows Standard part 7 bytes See Section C 2 004 004 001 004 004 5 bytes with 00 as default Figure C 1 Structure of the Par
164. apter see also Table 4 1 Compatibility You can easily replace old analog modules with the new analog modules without having to reconfigure and parameterize the modules You can also configure the new analog modules with the type file SIx xxxAE 200 under COM ET 200 Windows When configured with SIxxxxAE 200 the new modules behave like the old analog modules they replace with regard to configuration and diagnostics Type Files The names of the type files needed for COM ET 200 Windows are listed in Appendix A 1 In this Chapter The two type file versions SIxxxxAE 200 and SIxxxxBE 200 evince differ ences with regard to configuration parameterization and diagnostics informa tion In case you do not have access to the previous edition of this manual the points in which the newer version of the type file differs from the SIx 200 are described below In Section you will find on Page Status and error indication by LEDs E 2 Structure of device related diagnostics analog ET 200B E E 3 Configuration options 4 Parameters for the analog modules ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c E 1 Analog Modules and Old Type Files E 1 Status and Error Indication by LEDs Introduction The table below explains the error indications for analog ET 200B modules for configuration with the type file SIxxxxAE 200 Error Indication The table below explains the meanings of the signals provide
165. as ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4 812 6089 02c XV Contents Xvi E 7 E 8 E 9 1 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 Parameters for ET 200 4 8 6 57 134 0KH01 0XBO Parameters for ET 200 4 6ES7 134 0HF01 0XBO Parameters for ET 200B 4AO 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO Order Numbers Electronics Blocks for ET 200B Order Numbers Terminal Blocks for ET 200 Order Numbers Labeling Strips Accessories for the 200 Distributed I O System Manuals for 200 SIMATIC 55 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c System Overview In this Chapter The System Overview gives you information on the following In Section you will find on Page 1 1 What is the ET 200 distributed I O system What is ET 200B ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 1 1 System Overview 1 1 What is the 200 Distributed System Definition The ET 200 distributed I O system is based on the PROFIBUS standard EN 50170 Part 1 and the PROFIBUS DP standard EN 50170 Part 3 The field bus on which the ET 200 distributed I O system is based is a ver sion of PROFIBUS known as PROFIBUS DP DP Dezentrale Peripherie or distributed I O This version is designed for minimum reaction times in communication with
166. asters is described in Sections 5 3 3 to E ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 3 Structure of Slave Diagnostics Introduction A certain number of bytes is reserved per slave for slave diagnostics the pre cise number of bytes reserved depends on the station type Diagnostics of the ET 200B distributed I O station is in compliance with EN 50170 Part 3 The basic structure of slave diagnostics is described below Digital ET 200B The figure below shows the structure of slave diagnostics for digital ET 200B modules Byte 0 Byte 1 Station status 1 to 3 Byte 2 PROFIBUS DP standard Master station number PRO Bytes FIBUS DP standard Byte 4 High byte Manufacturer ID PRO Byte 5 Low byte J FIBUS DP standard Byte 6 Header device related diagnostics Byte 7 Device related diagnostics Bytes 8 to 12 Free Figure 5 1 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Digital 200B ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 9 Status and Error Diagnostics Analog ET 200B The figure below shows the structure of slave diagnostics for for analog ET 200B modules Byte 0 Byte 1 Station status 1 to 3 Byte 2 PROFIBUS DP standard Master station number PRO Byte 3 FIBUS DP standard Byte 4 High byte Manufacturer ID Byte 5 PROFIBUS DP stan Low byte
167. ating in groups of 1 e Output load voltage 120 V AC 4 150 V DC e Output current 4 A for outputs 0 0 and 0 7 2 A for outputs 0 1 to 0 6 e Outputs suitable for AC DC solenoid valves switches motor starters small power motors motors and lamps e Possible terminal block TB6 AC See Figure 7 22 for the precise dimensions RUN BF 200B asDI 8RO AC I0 00 Oo L4 Oo oO EX L15 L4 E15 Oe Oe Oe Oe L1 o7 a T 120 230 104 120 30 ae 1 GORELAY yc 24 OCT 2 3 2 2 DG l wen 74280 t 56 EET ELE 4 5 wif37 39 55 42 44 Xs he 19 fet Tee Tes Tes Te7 Ee Bo 131 N 58 64 xe 4 o ae 133 0HH00 0XB0 Figure 7 56 Front Elevation 200B 8DI 8RO AC 6ES7 133 0HH00 0XBO0 ET 200B Distributed
168. ation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI for Resistance Measurement Complement of Twos Units Resistance in Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range 1514131211109 8 7 6 543 2 1 48 150 300 600 2409 5646 17644 Bae eT app pot 0100101 101000 Over range 010000000000 0100000000000 010 0011000000000 010 0010000000000 010 0001000000000 0 0 Nominal range 0000000000001 0000000000000 Negative values physically im 0000000000000 possible Overflow X XXXXXXXXXXXXX Wire break ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 29 Analog Modules Measuring Range Pt 100 Resistance Thermometers Table 8 15 Complement of Twos The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for resistance thermometers Pt 100 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI for Resistance Thermometers Units gt 1766 Resistance in Q Tempera ture in Digitized Measured Value 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Range Overflow 1766 1702 1700 1400 1000 600 300 200 8 30 1 In the overrange any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited Overrange Nominal range Overrange ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Measuring Range The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized meas
169. ation with Bus Connector 6 57 972 0BA10 0XA0 and 6ES7 972 0BB10 OXA0 7 18 Dimensional Drawing 200B 16DI 7 19 Connection Diagram ET 2008 1601 7 20 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI and TB1 DC or TB3 DC 7 21 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI and 1 4 7 22 Dimensional Drawing ET 200B 32DI ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 7 23 Connection Diagram ET 200B 32DI ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 7 24 Block Diagram 200B 32DI ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms TB2 DC or 4 7 25 Block Diagram ET 200B 32DI or ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms TB2 4 DG sor Sb eei d edepol fae Pee Y ond ledge 7 26 Front Elevation ET 2008 1600 7 27 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO and TB1 DC or TB3 DC 7 28 Block Diagram 200B 16DO and 1 4 0 7 29 Front Elevation ET 200 160 2 7 30 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO 2A and TB2 DC TB4 DC 7 31 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO 2A 2 4 0 7 32 Front Elevation ET 200 32 7 33 Block Diagram ET 200B 32DO and TB2 DC or TBA DC 7 34 Block Diagram ET 200B 32DO and 2 4 0 7 35 Front Elevation ET 200
170. byte 3 Manufacturer ID high byte 4 Manufacturer ID low byte 5 Header byte 6 Device related diagnostics byte 7 device related diagnostics group diagnostics Free Free More Information You will find the information you need on slave diagnostics for digital Digital ET 200B ET 200B modules in the following sections General information on slave diagnostics operation with IM 308 B Structure of station status 1 to 3 Structure of the master station number and manufacturer ID Structure of device related diagnostics digital ET 200B ET 200B Distributed Station D 6 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x Analog ET 200B The table below shows the structure of slave diagnostics for analog ET 200B modules Table D 3 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Operation with IM 308 B Code Diagnostics address Diagnostics address 1 0 Station status 1 byte 0 Station status 2 byte 1 1 Station status 3 byte 2 Master station number byte 3 2 Manufacturer ID high byte 4 Manufacturer ID low byte 5 3 Header byte 6 Device related diagnostics byte 7 device related diagnostics reserved 4 Device related diagnostics byte 8 Device related diagnostics byte 9 reserved type of error 5 Device related diagnostics byte 10 Device related diagnostics byte 11 always 15g wrong station type 6 Device related diagnos
171. cal terms used in the manual At the end of the manual is a detailed index which you can use to refer to specific sections The ET200B distributed I O station is based on the PROFIBUS standard EN 50170 Part 1 and the PROFIBUS DP standard EN 50170 Part 3 Our KO ET 200 workshop is the ideal way to get to know the ET 200 dis tributed I O system If you would like more information please contact your regional Training Center or the following address Product Marketing for SIMATIC SINEC and COROS AUT 951 Frau Lades Postfach 4848 D 90327 N rnberg Tel 49 911 895 3154 Fax 49 911 895 5021 Please direct all technical queries to your Siemens contact partner in the of fice responsible for your area You can look up the addresses in the manuals for the CPUs for example in the Siemens Worldwide appendix of the manual 87 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation in cata logs and in CompuServe go autforum You may prefer to use our hotline support the number to dial is 49 911 895 7000 fax 7001 If you need type files or GSD files the modem number to dial is 49 911 737972 If you have any questions or comments this manual please complete the suggestions form and return it to us You will find this form at the back of the manual ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Contents 1 System Overview 1 1 What is the 200 Distributed I O System
172. ck from the terminal block or installing a replacement electronics block The TB6 DC terminal block has no STOP RUN switch Always switch off the external power supply before attempting to disengage an electronics block 120 230 V AC from the TB6 DC or installing a replacement elec tronics block 2 Press the slide 1 on the bottom of the terminal block down using a screwdriver and 3 Swing the terminal block out of the standard sectional rail 2 Figure 3 9 Dismantling the ET 200 ET 200B Distributed Station 3 14 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Dismantling from the Shield Connecting Ele ment Proceed according to the following steps 1 Remove the electronics block in the reverse sequence to that described in Fi gure 3 8 Warning Avoid electrical destruction of the electronics block Always set the STOP RUN switch of the terminal block to the STOP posi tion before disengaging the electronics block from the terminal block or installing a replacement electronics block The TB6 DC terminal block has no STOP RUN switch Always switch off the external power supply before attempting to disengage an electronics block 120 230 V AC from the TB6 DC or installing a replacement elec tronics block 2 Remove the terminal block and the shield connecting element in the re verse sequence to that described in Figures 3 5 3 6 ET 200B Distr
173. constant Byte 19 04H Slot For bytes Byte 20 01u Data record number 22to 35 Byte 21 OEH Data record length Bytes Parameters for 221035 analog value measurement See Figure 7 Figure C 5 Parameters for Analog Input Modules 4 8AI 4AI Channel Group The parameters listed on the following pages refer to channel groups for ET 200B 4 8AI and to channels for ET 200B 4AI Table C 1 shows the as signment of terminals to channels and channel groups Table C 1 Assignment of Terminals to Channel Groups Channel Group n Channel group 0 Channel group 0 Channel 0 terminals 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 terminals 0 1 0 2 Channel group 1 Channel group 1 Channel 1 terminals 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 terminals 1 1 1 2 Channel group 2 Channel group 2 Channel 2 terminals 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 terminals 2 1 2 2 Channel group 3 Channel group 3 Channel 3 terminals 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 terminals 3 1 3 2 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c C 5 Parameterization Telegram Bytes 15 16 C 6 Figure C 6 shows the contents of bytes 15 and 16 You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1 Byte 15 Byte 16 N 3 2 1 0 BitNo Diagnostics enable channel group 0 Diagnostics enable channel group 1 Diagnostics enable channel group 2 Diagnostics enable channel group 3 3210 Diagn
174. cription 16 channel screw type terminal 3 tier 16 channel screw type terminal 4 tier TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB3 DC 32 channel screw type terminal 3 tier 32 channel screw type terminal 4 tier 16 channel spring latch terminal TB4 DC TB4M DC TB6 AC 32 channel spring latch terminal 32 channel spring latch terminal with extra row of ter minals for additional grounds 16 channel screw type terminal 3 tier ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 3 Digital Modules 7 2 Terminal Blocks Introduction This section contains the dimensional drawings and the terminal numbering of the ET 200B terminal blocks The last subsection shows the dimensions of an ET 200B station with bus connector inserted Pin Assignment The pin assignment of the terminal blocks depends on which electronics block is installed and is therefore described in the section dealing with elec tronics blocks Sectio In this Section In Section you will find on Page 7 2 1 Terminal block TB1 DC 6ES7 193 0CA10 0XA0 7 2 2 Terminal block TB1 4 DC 6ES7 193 0CA20 0X A0 Terminal block TB2 DC 6ES7 193 0CB10 0XA0 Terminal block TB2 4 DC 6ES7 193 0CB20 0XA0 Terminal block TB4M DC 6ES7 193 0CE30 0XA0 Terminal block TB6 AC 6ES7 193 0CC10 0XA0 ET 200B Distributed Station 7 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules 7 2 1 Terminal Block TB1 DC 6 57 193 0CA10 0XA0 Dimensional Dra
175. cs enable measurement type mea suring range etc and with the coding plug on the TB8 input circuit The settings of a channel group apply to all the channels in the group in ques tion Input Circuit There are two ways of measuring analog signals from thermocouples resis tance thermometers resistors and voltage transducers e Floating ground measurement e Ground referenced measurement You set the input circuit for floating ground or ground referenced measure ment by means of the coding plugs on the TB8 one coding plug per channel group Floating Ground In the case of floating ground measurement differential measurement each Measurement signal line has its own signal reference conductor Differential measurement is required in the following cases e Ifthe sensors are connected to different potentials and e If the different signal sources are physically apart Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage of the differential inputs to analog ground Ma is 1V The maximum permissible voltage difference between Ma and PE must not exceed 75 V DC 60 V AC Avoid ground loops ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 7 Analog Modules Ground Referenced Mea surement Connecting Ther mocouples with Compensating Boxes Valid Compensat ing Boxes In the case of ground referenced measurement all signal reference conduc tors in 8 are connected to a common r
176. curs the analog input module signals underrun when FOC4y is undershot and outputs 8000 The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type J thermocouples Table 8 31 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type J Thermocouples Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range in C Type J 1450 1 32767 7FFFg Overflow 1450 0 14500 Overrange 1200 1 12001 1200 0 12000 Nominal range 210 0 2100 x 210 1 2101 F7CBg Underrange If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs the analog input module signals underrun when 1 is undershot and outputs 8000 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 43 Analog Modules Measuring Range Type K Thermo couples Measuring Range Type L Thermo couples 8 44 The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type K thermocouples Table 8 32 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type K Thermocouples Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range in Overrange Nominal range If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs the analog input module signals underrun when FOC4y is undershot and outputs 8000 The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type L therm
177. d binary Note The measuring range 4 to 20 mA is resolved to 2048 units in the interval 512 to 2560 For a representation in the range 0 to 2048 units 512 units must be subtracted per software ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 69 Analog Modules 8 5 5 A Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC 57 Analog Value Rep If you operate the ET 200B 4AI with SIMATIC 57 the analog values are rep resentation SI resented in complements of twos MATIC The table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B 4AI Table 8 51 Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern for SIMATIC 57 and ET 200B 4AI Bit Number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 Analog Value SI 214 213 212 21 210 29 28 27 26 Representation Bit 15 has no significance for the amount of the measured value It merely represents the sign Voltage Measuring The table below shows the representation of the digitized measuring values Ranges of the ET 200B 4AI for the measuring ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5 V and 10 V Table 8 52 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI Measuring Ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5 V and 10 V Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Range Range Range Range 125 V 25 5V 10V Deci Hexade Range mal cimal gt 1 4699 gt 2 9398 gt 5 8796 gt 11 759 32767 7FFFy 1 46986 11 7589 Overrange 1 25005 10 0004 1 2
178. d by the LEDs Analog ET 200B on analog ET 200B modules Table E 1 LEDs on Analog ET 200B Modules and their Meanings LED RUN LED BF LED DIA Meaning Off Off Voltage not applied to mod Check the power supply ule Check that the electronics block is correctly mounted on the terminal block Lit green Off Module is on the PROFIBUS DP and is exchanging data Lit green Lit red or off Lit red An error has occurred on the Read the diagnostics buffer module e g wire break mea to identi e error see suring range overshot Sections 53 and E2 If there is no diagnostics in formation in the buffer check parameterization to ascertain whether the diag nostics alarm and corre sponding channel diagnos tics have been enabled Lit green Flashing red Either Check the configuration in the DP master station number station type Module has not received parameterizationtelegram or telegram is incorrect Check the configuration Incorrect bus protocol Module has received in correct configuration data Lit green Flashing red Lit red Module has received incorrect Check parameterization and parameterization or configura configuration tion data Lit green Flashes once Module is powering up red Lit green Lit red No signifi Baud rate matching in prog Check the PROFIBUS DP cance ress connection Check the DP master 200B Distributed I O Station E 2 EW
179. d by the master to a slave Using this control command the master can freeze the outputs at the instan taneous value The output data for the subsequent frames is stored but the statuses of the outputs remain unchanged The outputs are not updated until the master sends the UNSYNC control command ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Glossary SYNC T Terminal block Terminating resis tor Type file W Wire break control command issued by the DP master to a group of DP slaves Using this control command the DP master instructs the DP slave to freeze the outputs at the instantaneous value In subsequent frames the slave stores the output data but the statues of the outputs remain unchanged Every time it receives a SYNC control command the DP slave sets the out puts it had stored as output data The outputs are not again cyclically updated until the DP master sends the UNSYNC control command The terminal block carries the hard wiring The electronics block plugs into the terminal block Resistor for matching the impedance of bus cables terminating resistors are always required at the ends of cables or segments In ET 200 the terminating resistors are activated deactivated in bus con nectors File required by COM ET 200 for configuring a slave station The type file contains the definitions of the slave specific characteristics for example number of inputs or outputs
180. d place the data in the diagnostics word ET 200B Distributed Station D 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x Example Request This example shows how to request station status 1 and 2 ing Diagnostics STL L KY 0 T PW 252 L PW 252 L KH 000C ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Program the following in STEP 5 Explanation Store in the Diagnostics address byte the number of the slave station n station number from which the station status is to be requested store the code for station status 1 and station status 2 code 0 in the Diagnos tics address 41 byte Load the diagnostics word Response monitoring activated No error Evaluate error in FBx D 5 Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x D 2 2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics Introduction 16 bytes per slave are reserved for slave diagnostics These 16 bytes are orga nized in 8 words The 2 diagnostics bytes of the diagnostics word are referred to below as the Diagnostics address and Diagnostics address 1 Digital ET 200B The table below shows the structure of slave diagnostics for digital ET 200B modules Table D 2 Structure of Slave Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B Operation with IM 308 B Code Diagnostics address Diagnostics address 1 Station status 1 byte 0 Station status 2 byte 1 Station status 3 byte 2 Master station number
181. d to undesired transient currents across the output module e You recommended to connect floating ground loads which are float ing with reference to each other In such cases connect analog ground MA with PE 3 to enhance noise immunity Theconnection terminals of unused outputs are left open e You must short circuit terminals K and For this purpose set the coding plug to the position N Caution If the supply voltage is below the lower tolerance limit the output analog values can deviate from the specified values Note Please note the explanation of shielding of analog lines in Sections 3 1 and 3 5 200B Distributed I O Station 8 78 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 4 Wire Connection The voltage on the load is re adjusted via two high resistance sensor lines per of Loads Voltage channel S S at terminals x 3 and x 4 In this way voltage drops of up to Output 3 V per line can be re adjusted Please ensure that the sensor lines are connected directly to the load A 4 wire connection of loads for voltage output is shown below x 3 x 1 x 2 4 7 7 7 BC AA TB8 1
182. d to M1 M2 nected to PE screw 36 10 Input age internally jump ered connected to 10 Input 10 Input 10 Input I0 Input 10 Input 10 Input Voltage supply L1 Ground supply M1 PE internally jump for channel group QO for channel group QO ered but not con 0 to 7 0 to 7 nected to PE screw not used not used Voltage supply Ground connection internal logic and sen internal logic and sen sor voltage 24 V sor voltage e ele Voltage supply Ground connection internal logic and sen internal logic and sen sor voltage 24 V sor voltage TBI 4 DC only 200B Distributed Station 7 58 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules HW Cutoff Bit Assignment in the Cutoff Level Byte Outputs 0 to 7 are deactivated as soon as the programmed cutoff level is applied to the corresponding input 0 to 7 The relationship between inputs and outputs is permanent I 0 O 0 I 1 O 1 Address assignment EB x Inputs 0 to 7 ABy Outputs 0 to 7 2 consecutive bytes in the 1 Cutoff level 0 to 7 negated address space of the CPU The cutoff level byte defaults to 0 i e output y n is deactivated set to 70 if signal 1 is present at input x n 0 Output is deactivated by signal 1 at corresponding input 1 Output is deactivated by signal 1 at corresponding input Table 7 11 Truth Table for Hardware Cutoff of
183. der to program and start up an ET 200B with STEP 7 you require the manuals listed in Table F 6 To order manuals with 6ES7 order numbers see Catalog ST 70 Table F 6 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 57 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation M7 300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation Topics including Description of the PROFIBUS DP interface of the CPU 315 2 DP Structuring the PROFIBUS DP network e Bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters Topics including Description of the PROFIBUS DP interfaces in M7 300 Structuring the PROFIBUS DP network e Bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters 57 400 M7 400 Programmable Controllers Module Specification System Software for S7 300 and 57 400 Program Design Programming Manual System Software for S7 300 and 57 400 System Standard Functions Reference Manual ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Topics including Description of the PROFIBUS DP interfaces in 57 400 and M7 400 Structuring a PROFIBUS DP network e Bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters Topics including description of addressing and diagnostics in SIMATIC S7 Description of the SFCs in STEP 7 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Glossary B Baud rate Bus Bus connector Bus segment Bus station C Chassis ground Coding plug Coding slide switch Data transmission rate specifies the number of bits trans
184. dle Min supply voltage 3V Max 1 mA 0 5 A Approx 20 us Max 0 5 ms Max 1000 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Max 8 Hz Yes 2 Max 5 W Possible Typ L1 L4 55 V Max 100 m 328 ft Tn operation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud 7 43 Digital Modules 7 3 6 X Electronics block ET 200B 8RO 6 57 132 0GF00 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 8RO electronics block has the following characteristics e 8relay outputs floating in groups of 1 e Switching voltage 24 to 60 V DC Possible terminal blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC or TB3 DC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 18 for the precise dimensions ing RUN BF a 200B ero 7 00 Relay DC 24V 60V 2 1A 0 4 2 3 4 15 6 7 3 O r3 OG r3 9 9 E 1 d2 d d 551817 le 19 do in H2 3 h4 hs he Tus 132 0GF00 0XB0 Figure 7 35 Front
185. dule The table and Output shows the codings for the type of output plus the codings for the correspond Ranges ing output ranges You must enter the codings for the desired output range in bytes 24 to 27 see Figure C 10 5 Codings for Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module Output Type Coding Output Range Coding Bits 4 to 7 Bits 0 to 3 Deactivated 240000 Deactivated 2 0000 Voltage 240001 0010 241000 10V 2 1001 Current 2 0010 0 to 20 mA 2 0010 4to 20 mA 2 0011 20 mA 2 0100 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c C 13 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x Introduction You do not need the information in this chapter unless you want to replace old ET 200B modules that you configured with COM ET 200 V4 x with the new ET 200B modules order numbers see Appendix F described in this manual Compatibility You can easily replace old ET 200B modules with the new ET 200B modules without having to reconfigure and parameterize the modules You can also configure the new ET 200B modules with the type files under COM 200 V4 x When used in conjunction with the IM 308 B and COM ET 200 V 4 x the new modules behave like the old ET 200B modules they replace with regard to configuration and diagnostics Type Files The gn the type files needed for COM ET 200 V4 x are listed in Ap A 1 see also Table 4 1
186. dy Set the STOP RUN switch to STOP and then back to RUN 200B Distributed Station 5 2 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics 5 2 Status and Error Indication by LEDs Introduction The indicators on the front panels of the ET 200B provide initial indication of the type of error Error Indication The meanings of the signals provided by the LEDs on digital ET 200B mod Digital ET 200B ules are listed in the table below Table 5 1 LEDs on Digital ET 200B Modules and their Meanings State Meaning Lit green ET 200B in operation power supply switched on STOP RUN switch in RUN position Lit red Either Response monitoring time has elapsed without the ET 200B station being addressed because connection to the IM 308 C or to the S7 M7 DP master has failed or the IM 308 C is set to STOP or The ET 200B station was not parameterized on startup restart Lit red For digital 24 V DC output modules one output at least short circuit or load voltage failure L1 L2 L3 L4 For analog modules diagnostics for at least one input or output Lit green For ET 200B 16DO 8DI 8DO 8DI 8DO HWA 16DI 16DO 24DI 8DO and 24DI 8DO 0 2ms e Voltage is applied for channel group QO 0 7 2 Lit green For ET 200B 16DO 16DI 16DO Voltage is applied for channel group Q1 0 7 2 L14 L2 Lit green For ET 200B 32DO Voltage is applied for channel groups QO 0 7 and
187. e 7 44 Front Elevation ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 133 0BL00 0XBO ET 200B Distributed Station 7 62 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 16DI 16DO and TB2 DC or TB4 DC ET200B 16DI 16DO PROFIBUS DP 222 5V 4V p Logic fe See Driver Driver 1 1 1 1 1 1 u 1 1 1 10 0 7 8x 7 16x 11 0 7 00 Q1 SE 0 7 0 7 15 5 L1 L2 2 1 x1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 DC or Station TB4 DC number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN switch Connection Suppr Suppr PROFIBUS DP logic logic M5 vo L1 M1 L2 4M2 L5 5 o Supply Voltage du 5 RS ss sensor Ground L e D gt d d Screw for 24V grounding Digital Digital suppl see 3 4 outputs inputs 2 Figure 7 45 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 133 0BL00 0XBO TB2 DC or TB4 DC 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 63 Digita
188. e Coding Slide Switch Setting Module Class 24 V digital modules 24 V special modules Setting the Station Any station number from 00 to 99 can be set with the aid of a tool such as a Number screwdriver see Sectior 2 1 Figure 2 1 10 e Station numbers 3 to 99 are permissible when operating with the IM308 B master interface e Station numbers 1 to 99 are permissible when operating with the IM 308 C master interface or with the S7 M7 DP master The station number becomes valid only after a STOP RUN transition of the ET 200B slave station Setting the Coding The coding plus of the TB8 provide the means of setting the defaults for ana Plug log value measurement and analog value output for each channel in the case of analog modules see Section 21 Figure 2 2 7 The coding plugs enable you to set the input or output circuitry of the TB8 to suit the measured value sensor or load connected and the desired measuring or output method The possible settings for the coding plugs are A B C and D The relationships between the various settings of the coding plugs and the measurement output method and the measured value sensors and loads are detailed in the sections dealing with the individual electronics blocks see Sections 8 4 through 8 6 The procedure for changing the settings of the cod ing plugs is described below 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 9 Mechanical and Elec
189. e aid of a tool such as a screwdriver When operating with an IM 308 B master interface station numbers 3 to 90 are permissible When operating with an IM 308 C master interface or with an S7 M7 DP master station numbers 1 to 99 are permissible ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 1 5 System Overview 1 2 2 Electronics Block Definition Characteristics The electronics block contains the logic circuits and is plugged onto the ter minal block The electronics block has the following characteristics There is galvanic isolation between the PROFIBUS DP bus and the inter nal electronics The block has LEDs for indicating the following Voltage supply to the logic circuits RUN Bus fault BF Group diagnostics short circuit wire break or load voltage failure DIA only for electronics blocks which can be diagnosed Load voltage monitoring L1 L2 L3 14 only for digital elec tronics blocks 24 V DC with output channels Status of the inputs or outputs for digital electronics blocks only e Labeling strips are inserted in the electronics block in the labeling strips to ensure unambiguous assignment of name channel and LED ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Technical Description In this Chapter This chapter contains information on In Section you will find on Page Design of the Terminal Block Design of the Electronics Block
190. e of digital ET 200B modules do not overwrite the 5 bytes which default to 00g in the parameterization telegram In the case of analog ET 200B modules you can use the parameterization telegram to define diagnostics response and set the defaults for analog value measurement or analog value output as applicable When parameterizing with COM 200 4 you enter only the user spe cific part of the parameterization telegram without standard part in the KH format DP Slave Parameterization Telegram dialog box When you open the DP Slave Parameterization Telegram dialog box for the first time the parameterization telegram is structured and contains certain defaults as shown below e For ET 200B 4 8AT DP SLAVE PARAMETERIZATION TELEGRAM Bytel input in KH format o 23 00 oo 00 00 oo aa 14 14 14 10 14 00 00 00 00 00 06 20 FF 00 00 00 00 For ET 200B 4AT DP SLAVE PARAMETERIZATION TELEGRAM Bytel input in KH format o 23 00 oo oo oo 00 19 19 19 10 19 00 00 00 06 20 FF 00 00 00 00 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x e For ET 200 4 DP SLAVE PARAMETERIZATION TELEGRAM Byte input in KH format
191. e shuts off the sen sor voltage but the logic continues to function for at least another 20 ms bridging power failure The lack of the sensor voltage means that signal 0 is detected at the inputs and the outputs are enabled if the configuration is as described above The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 1 6 A in the terminal blocks Nevertheless make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in the technical data for the electronics block ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data Technical Data Baud rates Bus protocol FREEZE and SYNC capa bility Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD Diagnostics functions The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Max 3 8 W Approx 650 g 160 x 130 x 60 Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring Status of inputs and out puts Green RUN LED Red BF LED Red DIA LED Green L1 LED Green LEDs Supply voltage for sensor supply load voltage supply and internal logic Supply voltage L1 L3 Rated value Permissible range e Valuefort 0 5s Current consumptio
192. easuring Range The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Pt 100 Resistance ues for resistance sensors Pt 100 Sensors Table 8 28 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI for Pt 100 Resistance Sensors Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range Stan dard Pt 100 850 C Overrange Nominal range Underrange Measuring Range The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Ni 100 Resistance ues for resistance sensors Ni 100 Sensors Table 8 29 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI for Ni 100 Resistance Sensors Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range Stan dard Ni 100 250 C Overrange Nominal range Underrange ET 200B Distributed Station 8 42 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Measuring Range Type E Thermo couples Measuring Range Type J Thermo couples The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type E thermocouples Table 8 30 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type E Thermocouples Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range in C Type E z 1200 1 32767 Overflow 1200 0 12000 Overrange 1000 1 10001 1000 0 10000 Nominal range 270 0 2700 lt 270 1 2701 573 Underrange If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range oc
193. ection to SINEC L2 and to SI NEC L2 DP The CP 5410 S5 DOS ST can be plugged into only the PG 730 740 750 and 770 programming devices The highest level of slave specific diagnostics Device related diagnostics refers to the entire slave The detection pinpointing classification and further evaluation of errors faults malfunctions and signals Diagnostics provides monitoring functions which run automatically while the system is in operation This enhances plant availability by reducing setup times and outages ET 200 supports a number of diagnostics options ranging from an overview of the DO slaves which have reported diagnostics down to monitoring of in dividual channels Modules having diagnostics capability report systems to the central CPU by means of diagnostics alarms In SIMATIC S7 M7 When an error is detected or disappears e g wire break the module triggers a diagnostics alarm if alarms are enabled The CPU interrupts processing of the application program or lower priority classes and processes the diagnostics alarm block OB 82 In SIMATIC 55 The diagnostics alarm is mapped within device related diag nostics Errors such as wire break etc are detected by regularly querying the diagnostics bits of device related diagnostics ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Glossary Distributed sta tion DP master DP slave Electronics block ET 200 Floating An input output d
194. ects chassis to PE 5 screw for connecting PE PROFIBUS DP interface Switch for setting the station number the station number is valid only after operation of the STOP RUN switch STOP RUN ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Technical Description Design Principle of the front of the TB8 analog terminal block there are an additional 5 cod the TB8 Analog ing switches Block 1 ERU STEMENS ip 57 1932000102080 000000 og ae 10 wk RUN iue 3 gi TB 2 7 Figure 2 2 TB8 Un 10 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Coding slide switch Fuse STOP RUN switch The power supply for logic circuits in the electron ics block can be switched on or off with the STOP RUN switch It can also be used to switch the ET 200B distributed I O station on and off Terminals for power supplies Terminals for inputs outputs Slide for removing the terminal block from the sta
195. ed Station 7 72 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol FREEZE and SYNC capa bility Galvanic isolation to SINEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD Diagnostics functions The technical data of electronics blocks ET 200B 24DI 8DO and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2 ms is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Max 5 5 W Approx 800 g 28 oz 235 x 130 x 60 mm 9 17 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Inputs continued Delay of inputs for 6ES7 133 0BN00 0XBO Delay of inputs for 6ES7 133 0BN10 0XBO Connection of 2 wire BERO Quiescent current Connection of mechanical switches Cable length of sensors e Unshielded Outputs 3 ms 0 2 ms Possible lt 1 5 mA Possible Max 100 m 328 ft Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring Status of inputs and out puts Green RUN LED Red BF LED Red DIA LED Green L1 LED Green LEDs Supply voltage for sensor supply load voltage supply and internal logic Supply voltage L1 L5 Rated value Permissible range Value for t lt 0 5 s Current consumption from L5 Logic e Sensors for the inrush current Inputs 24 V DC 18
196. eference point analog ground MA To avoid ground loops galvanically isolated and ungrounded signal sources thermocouples Pt 100 voltage sources are required Note Connect to PE 5 to enhance noise immunity in the case of ground referenced measurement The ET 200B 4 8AI does not have an internal compensating box The influ ence of temperature on the reference junction can be countered with a com pensating box Please note the following rules when connecting a compensating box e Jna configuration with external compensation you need only one com pensating box for all the thermocouples of a single type E J K L N T U in a module Connect the compensating box to terminals and see for example Figure 8 6 e Inaconfiguration with external compensation you can connect a maxi mum of 4 different thermocouples a different type of thermocouple for each channel group if you use a separate compensating box for each con nection In this case the unused and K terminals must be connected to MA see Figure 8 7 e Jna configuration with external compensation and one compensating box per channel the same thermocouple type must be used per channel group The compensating box requires a floating power supply The power sup ply unit of the compensating box must have a grounded braided shield Figures 8 6 to 8 8 illustrate the connection options for thermocouples A maximum of 8 thermocouples
197. ensions EB and TB WxHxD Diagnostics functions Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Status of outputs 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Typ 2 W Approx 650 g 22 75 oz 160 x 130 x 60 mm 6 24 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Green RUN LED Red LED Green LEDs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation e n groups of Short circuit protection Continuous current It Relay type Cycling capacity of con tacts e Resistive load Inductive load Mechanical service life Switching rate Cable length Unshielded Setting of a digital input 5 Dold OW 5699 Max 2 A at 24 V DC Max 1 5 A at 48 V DC Max 1 Aat 60 V DC Max 0 5 A at 30 V DC gt 108 switching operations Max 20 s Max 100 m 328 ft Possible Supply voltage for relay outputs and internal logic Supply voltage L3 Rated value Permissible range e Value fort lt 0 5 s Current consumption from L3 Logic for inrush current 7 48 24 V DC 18 5 to 30 2 V 35V Typ 130 mA 0 05 A2s noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules 7 3 7 Electronics Block ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0 01 0 0 Characteristics Dimensional Draw ing The ET 200B 8DI 8DO electronics block has the following characteristics e 8 inpu
198. ensions EB and TB WxHxD The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 16DO AC is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes 500 V DC to logic 1500 V AC to connection terminals Max 11 W Approx 805 g 29 oz 235 x 130 x 60 mm 9 17 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Diagnostics functions Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring Status of outputs Green LED Red BF LED No No Green LEDs Supply voltage for internal logic Supply voltage L1 Rated value Permissible range Frequency Current consumption from L1 120 230 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz Typ 150 mA noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Outputs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation e n groups of Signal voltage Output voltage For 1 signal 250 mA For 1 signal x50 mA Output current For 0 signal Delay of outputs Short circuit protection Switching frequency e Resistive load e Inductive load Lamp load Load current per output in preferred mounting position e 0 Cto40 C 32 F to 104 F e 40 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F Load current per output in other mounting positions e 0 Cto40 C 32 F to
199. erface between electronics block and terminal block Station number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN switch Connection ne o oj o o MS Be o X De 5 sensor 4 4 gt 4 4 e X M d G e e Screw for grounding Digital 24V see Seo 3 4 inputs supply Figure 7 25 Block Diagram ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 00 0 0 or ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO and TB2 4 DC 7 22 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 32DI and ET 200B 32DI 0 2 ms For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB2 4 DC by way of example Table 7 4 Pin Assignmentof Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and TB4M DC for ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO and ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6 57 131 0BL10 0XBO Terminal numbering TB2 4 DC 1213 1415 6 7189 I10 Il 12 I3 M 15 16 17 18 19 21 21 22 23124 25 26 27 281293 30 3113 33 34 35 36 37 38 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 68 59 60 61 62 63 64 L5 L54 65 66 67 68 62170772173 74175 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 184 85 86 87 88 189190 91 92 93 94 95 96 M5 MS oooooooojjlojojooeobooeooo Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier
200. ering printed on the ing TB3 DC spring latch terminal 1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 I2 M lb l6 17 18 20 71 22 23 25 26 27 28 23 30 31 32 4135136 3738 014 SST ES Ea a 62613 13 AL ALALALALALALALALALALAT A Ma EO y i i i i Figure 7 6 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TB3 DC Spring Latch Terminal ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 7 Digital Modules 7 2 4 Terminal Block TB2 DC 6 57 193 0CB10 0XA0 Dimensional Draw Figure 7 7 is a dimensional drawing of the TB2 DC screw type terminal ing 3 tier 12 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 n 2 13 5 6 1718 1920 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 35 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 645154 65 B6 67 88 ES 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 73 80 82 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 5 25 7 25 7
201. ermissible range Continuous current Ith Switching capacity of con tacts High current points Resistive load 24 V DC 120 V AC 120 V DC Inductive load 24 V DC 120 V AC 120 V DC Low current points Resistive and inductive loads 24 V DC 120 V AC 120 V DC Switching cycles of con tacts acc to VDE 0660 Part 200 e DC 11 e 15 Switching frequency e Resistive load Inductive load Cable length Setting a digital input 4 0 0 0 7 1 0 and 1 7 12 0 1 to 0 6 1 1 to 1 6 Yes relays 1 Takamisawa NY 24 W K 24 to 150 V DC 120 V AC 0 1 to 150 V DC 79 to 150 V AC 4A for high current points 2 for low current points 0 to 40 C 60 C 3210 104 F 140 F 4A 2A 0 2A 0 2 2 2 02 0 2 0 to 40 60 C 32 to 104 140 F 2A 1A 0 2A 0 2 gt 100 x 106 gt 300 105 10 Hz 2 Hz 600 m 1968 ft Possible ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules 7 3 14 Electronics Block ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC 6 57 133 0HH00 0XBO Characteristics Dimensional Draw ing The ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC electronics block has the following characteris tics 8 inputs floating in groups of 4 e 8 outputs floating in groups of 1 Input voltage 120 230 V AC Inputs suitable for switches and 2 wire proximity switches acc to IEC 1131 type 1 e S8relay outputs flo
202. evice used not in the central device but installed at a con siderable distance from the CPU Distributed I O stations include ET 200M ET 200B ET 200C 2000 e DP AS I Link e S5 95U with PROFIBUS DP slave interface e Other DP slaves from Siemens or other vendors The distributed I O stations connect to the DP master via the PROFIBUS DP bus A master which behaves in accordance with standard EN 50170 Part 3 is known as a DP master A slave which operates on the PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP proto col and which behaves in accordance with standard EN 50170 Part 3 is a DP slave Upper section of the ET 200B distributed I O station The electronics block contains the logic and plugs into the terminal block The ET 200 distributed I O system with the PROFIBUS DP protocol is a bus for connecting distributed I O to a CPU or an adequate DP master ET 200 is characterized by fast reaction times since only small amounts of data bytes are transferred on the bus ET 200 15 based on the PROFIBUS standard EN 50170 Part 1 and the PRO FIBUS DP standard EN 50170 Part 3 ET 200 operates on the master slave principle DP masters can be for exam ple the IM 308 C master interface module or the CPU 315 2 DP DP slaves can be the ET 200B ET 200C ET 200M ET 200U distributed I O stations or Siemens DP slaves or other vendor devices The reference potentials of control and load circuits are galvanically isolated in t
203. f a utility model or design reserved Siemens AG Automation Group Industrial Automation Systems P O Box 4848 D 90327 Nuremberg Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described Since deviations cannot be pre cluded entirely we cannot guarantee full agreement However the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary cor rections included in subsequent editions Suggestions for improve ment are welcomed Technical data subject to change Siemens AG 1995 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No 6ES5 998 4ET21 Preface Purpose of the Manual Contents of the Manual Scope of the Manual Electronic Manuals Other Requisite Manuals The information contained in this manual will allow you e To install wire and start up the ET 200B distributed I O station e To find module characteristics and technical specifications quickly and easily The following explains the structure of the contents of the manual What is the 20087 Chap 1 Which control and display ae Chap 2 elements does the ET 200B have How is the ET 200B installed Chap 3 How do I configure Chap and parameterize the ET 200B Faults Chap 5 Technical Specifications
204. ferred per second baud rate bit rate ET 200 supports baud rates from 9 6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud Common transmission path connecting all stations has two defined ends In ET 200 the bus is a two wire cable or a waveguide Physical connection between bus station and bus cable ET 200 has bus connectors with and without adapter for programming de vice PC and having IP 20 and IP 65 protection ratings Segment Device which can send or receive data via the bus or amplify this data e g DP master DP slave RS 485 repeater active star coupler The entire range of interconnected inactive parts of a device that are not sub ject to any dangerous touch voltages even in the event of a fault You set the input output circuit of analog modules by means of the coding plugs The setting of the coding slide switch on the terminal block determines which electronics block can be connected ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Glossary 1 Glossary Configuring Control command CP 5410 S5 DOS ST D Device related diagnostics Diagnostics Diagnostics alarm Glossary 2 Assigning addresses for the inputs outputs of a slave station A DP master can send commands simultaneously to a group of slaves to syn chronize the slave stations Event driven synchronization of slave stations is possible using the control commands FREEZE and SYNC Programming device interface for conn
205. from L Logic 24 V DC 18 5 30 2 V 35 V 80 mA noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum possible baud rate is 1500 kbaud ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Inputs Number of inputs Galvanic isolation to internal electronics Galvanic isolation to voltage supply of internal logic Measured value ranges Thermocouples Resistors Resistance thermometers Voltage Permissible input voltage for voltage input destruction limit Characteristic curve linea rization for thermocouples for thermal resistors Linearization accuracy in nominal range for thermo couples Connection of signal sensors For voltage measurement For resistance measure ment 2 wire connection 4 wire connection Input resistance Measured value representa tion e SIMATIC 55 e SIMATIC S7 Overrange The technical data of the ET200B 4 8AI electronics block are listed in the 8 voltage inputs or 4 in puts for resistance ther mometers and resistors or 8 inputs for thermo couples No Yes Types E J K L N T U 48 Q 150 Q 300 Q 600 Q Pt 100 Ni 100 t 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1000 mV 32 V Types E J K L N T U Pt 100 standard range Ni 100 standard range xo 1 C Possible Possible Possible 10 MQ 12 bit complement of twos or 11 bit amount with sign selectable Max 14 bit complement of twos depends on in tegrati
206. g the TB2 4 DC by way of example Table 7 13 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC and TB4 DC for ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 01 0 and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6ES7 133 11 0 0 Terminal numbering TB2 4 DC 12131415 6 7189 101112 3 M I5 16 17 1R 19 21 21 22 23124 25 26 27 281231 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 68 59 60 61 62 63 64 L5 L5 4 65 66 67 68 68170772173 74175 76 77 78 79180 81182 83 184 85 86 87 88 189190 91 92 93 94 95 96 M5 MS o 6 ooooopoooDooo 5Oo ooo eo oooooo jeooo5osoOJ9 oJolo Voltage supply L1 Ground M1 for chan PE internally jump creo uera e rei inrer s v aro 9 IpuO 24 V sensor voltage Ground sensor volt 10 Input 1 connected to L5 age connected to M5 10 Input 2 10 NE 3 12 Input 0 12 Input 1 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 T1 Digital Modules Table 7 13 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC and TB4 DC for ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 01 0 0 and ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6ES7 133 11 0 0 continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41 I2 Input 2 59 24 V sensor voltage Ground sensor volt PE
207. g Remark Oto Channel type 4 8 1 4 17 7 T34 4 Oto Number of diagnostics bits output per 08g 4AO 18 7 channel by a module 19 Oto Number of channels of a module Oly to 044 4AL 4A0 7 Oly to 08g 4 8 Channel error vector Channel error channel 0 4 8 20 Channel error channel 1 4 8 4 4AO Channel error channel 2 4 8 4 4AO Channel error channel 3 Channel error channel 4 Channel error channel 5 Channel error channel 6 Channel error channel 7 21 to 28 Channel specific errors See Table 5 11 1 The number of bytes depends on the number of channels in the module Analog Channel Table 5 11 shows the assignment of the diagnostics byte for an analog input or analog output channel Table 5 11 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input Analog Output Channel Analog Input Channel 4 8AI Analog Output Channel 4 4 Configuration parameterization error Common mode error 4 8AI only 0 reserved Byte 0 reserved 0 reserved Ground short circuit Wire break feed current monitoring meas transducer Pt 100 Ni 100 R 0 reserved 0 reserved Measuring range overshoot 0 reserved Measuring range overshoot 0 reserved In the case of the ET 200 4 8 a wire break error is superimposed on common mode and measuring range errors occurring atthe same time common mode and mea suring range err
208. g questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 very good to 5 poor Do the contents meet your requirements Is the information you need easy to find Is the text easy to understand Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements Duo mes ee qan ds Please rate the quality of the graphics tables Additional comments ET 200B Distributed Station 2 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c
209. gnostics Alarm 5 11 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input Analog Output Channel 7 1 ET 200B Digital Electronics Blocks 7 2 ET 200B Digital Terminal Blocks 7 3 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 16Dl 4 2 dne here eed Ri edad 7 18 7 4 Pin Assignmentof Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and TBAM DC for ET 200B 32DI and ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 7 5 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 16DO 7 29 7 6 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and for ET 200B 16DO 2A 7 35 7 7 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC for ET 200B 32DO 7 41 7 8 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 8RO 7 47 7 9 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200 8 8 7 52 7 10 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC TB3 DC for ET 200B 8DI 8DO 7 58 7 11 Truth for Hardware Cutoff of ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 7 59 7 1
210. grammed deactivation level ap plied to the input Input voltage 24 V DC Input delay 3 ms Load voltage 24 V DC Possible terminal blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC or TB3 DC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 18 for the precise dimensions ing RUN BF DIA Lit HWA 1 02 01 J o ou1 gt 4 0024V 54 1 0 24 0 45 2 34 5 6 7 0 40 2 3 4 5 66 7 dt 2 s Je 5 Je z 19 dho In hz ha ds 5 he l6 E LL Mt 35 36 37 58 39 440 25 26 77 28 29 30 j31 52 L3 e 133 0BH10 0X80 Figure 7 41 Front Elevation ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6 57 133 0BH10 0XBO 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 55 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplifieddiagram of potential for the ET 200B 8DI DO HW
211. h byte Lower limit value Low byte 4 channel 0 High byte Upper limit value chan Low byte 4 nel 2 channel 1 High byte Lower limit value chan Low byte nel 2 channel 1 J For the ET 200B 4 8AI only the combination of single channel addressing and parameterization of channel group 0 for resistance measurement Pt 100 Ni 100 R entails display of Upper lower limit value overshoot for channel 1 In all other cases i e module addressing and single channel addressing and parameterization of channel group 0 for other than resistance measurement Pt 100 Ni 100 R Up per lower limit value overshoot is displayed for channel 2 Figure C 7 Bytes 22 and 35 for Analog Input Modules 4 8 4AT ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c C 7 Parameterization Telegram Integration Time set per channel group in byte 23 for the 4 8AI see Figure C 7 Table C 2 Codings for the Integration Times of the 4 8AI Table C 2 contains the codings for the various integration times that you can Integration Time Coding Type of Measure ment and Measur ing Ranges suring range in bytes 24 to 27 see Figure C 7 Table C 3 ules Measurement Coding Type Bits 4 to 7 Table C 3 lists all measuring ranges of the analog input modules The table shows the codings for the type of measurement plus the codings for the corre sponding measuring ranges You must enter the codings for t
212. h terminal 12 I3 14 15 18 19 20 21 22 23 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 38 40 41 44 45 46 47 50 51 52 53 54 55 59 60 62 63 55 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 76 77 78 79 82 83 84 85 86 87 91 82 93 94 95 Figure 7 14 Terminal Numbering Terminal Block TBAM DC Spring Latch Terminal ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 11 Digital Modules 7 2 8 Terminal Block TB6 AC 6ES7 193 0CC10 0XA0 Dimensional Draw Figure 7 15 is a dimensional drawing of the TB6 AC screw type terminal ing 3 tier 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0 n 2 3 5 1718 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 32 34 35 35 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 6I 62 63 64 1111 55 66 67 58 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 7 78 79 80 82 84 85 86 87 89 90 92 93 94 95 S6 N
213. hannels 4 5 Diagnostics enable for channel group 3 channels 6 7 Wire break monitoring enable for channel group 0 channels 0 1 Wire break monitoring enable for channel group 1 channels 2 3 Wire break monitoring enable for channel group 2 channels 4 5 Wire break monitoring enable for channel group 3 channels 6 7 Integration time for module Measurement type and range for channel group 0 channels 0 1 Measurement type and range for channel group 1 channels 2 3 Measurement type and range for channel group 2 channels 4 5 Measurement type and range for channel group 3 channels 6 7 Representation of measured values Measured value representation Parameters for ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 Explanation Value Range Diagnostics messages enabled separately for each channel group only for thermocouples resistance thermome ters Pt 100 Ni 100 and voltage sensors 80 mV Wire break monitoring enabled separately for each channel group Enter an optimum integration time for the A D converter to help suppress noise voltage You can set the measurement type and range separately for each channel group For voltage measurement For resistance thermometer with linearization For thermocouple with external reference junction Sets representation of the measured values for module Sets data format for analog value representa tion SIMATIC S5 Disable Enable 16
214. have the value 07g in the Header device related diagnostics byte 7 0 Bit No 1 9 IN 2 Byte 6 ck ck Length of device related diagnostics incl byte 6 7 bytes Code for device related diagnostics Figure 5 3 Structure of the Header Device Related Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B Byte 6 The device related diagnostics of digital ET 200B modules with diagnostics capability consists of one byte see Figure 5 1 765 43 2 1 0 BitNo Byte 7 CG 0 Overload output short circuit to M CG 0 Fuse defective no load voltage CG 1 Overload output short circuit to M CG 1 Fuse defective no load voltage CG 2 Overload output short circuit to M CG 2 Fuse defective no load voltage CG 3 Overload output short circuit to M CG 3 Fuse defective no load voltage CG Channel group Figure 5 4 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics for Digital ET 200B Byte 7 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics Channel Group Note the following as regards evaluation of device related diagnostics Note The channel group of an ET 200B digital module always takes up one byte in the S5 address space of the CPU corresponding to 8 inputs or 8 outputs irrespective of the galvanic isolation of the module grouping Example ET 200B 16DO 2A galvanic isolati
215. he case of floating I O modules this is achieved for example by means of optocouplers relay contacts or line transformers Input and output circuits may be grouped ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Glossary 3 Glossary Floating ground measurement FREEZE G Ground referenced measurement GSD file IP 20 Master Glossary 4 Each signal line has its own signal reference line Floating ground measurement is required if the sensors are connected to different potentials and e if different signal sources are physically apart A gt command issued by the DP master to a group of DP slaves When it receives the FREEZE control command the DP slave freezes the current status of the inputs and transmits this information cyclically to the DP master Every time it receives a FREEZE control command the DP slave re freezes the status of its inputs The input data is not again cyclically transmitted by the DP slave to the DP master until the DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command All signal reference lines are run to common gt reference potential Device master data file file in which the slave specific characteristics such as number of inputs or outputs number of diagnostics bits SYNC capability etc are defined There is a GSD file for every Siemens DP standard slave You need this file only if you want to connect a DP standard slave to a DP master tha
216. he desired mea Codings for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Mod Measuring Range Coding Bits 0 to 3 Voltage 280001 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 4 1 4 1 4AT 2 0001 240010 240011 240100 240101 280110 2840100 241001 Current 2 0010 4 1 4AI 4 8AI 4 8AT A 8AT 4 8AI 240010 24001 240100 240001 240010 240100 2840110 Thermal resis 2311000 Pt 100 standard range 4 8 2440010 tance linearization Ni 100 standard range 4 8AT 290011 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Parameterization Telegram Table C 3 ules continued Codings for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Mod Measurement Type Thermal elements with linearization Coding Bits 4 to 7 241110 Measuring Range N NiCrSi 51 4 8AD Type E NiCr CuNi 4 8AI Type J Fe CuNi IEC 4 8AD Type L Fe CuNi DIN 4 8AI Type T Cu CuNi IEC 4 8AI Type K NiCr Ni 4 8AT U Cu CuNi DIN 4 8AI Coding Bits 0 to 3 240001 240010 240101 240110 280111 241000 241001 1 ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c The measuring ranges apply only to the modules in parentheses C 9 Parameterization Telegram C 5 Parameters for Analog Output Module Parameters for The next byte
217. hield E 4 24V Pt100 Pt100 Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC a PE Ma Mexternal Figure 8 10 Connection of Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 with 2 Wire Connections Ground Referenced Measurement 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 15 Analog Modules Connection of Re sistance Thermom eters 4 Wire Con nection Floating Ground Measurement x 3 x 1 x 2 X 4M sl 8 16 If resistance thermometers or resistors are connected resistance can be mea sured by means of a 4 wire connection A constant current Ic is fed to the resistance thermometer via terminals x 1 and x 2 The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via 3 4 This means that voltage drops on the constant current lines do not corrupt the result of the measurement The measurement inputs have a high resistance so that only a negligible voltage drop occurs on the measuring lines Figures 8 11 and 8 12 show the two methods of connecting resistance ther mometers and resistors in a 4 wire connection taking a Pt 100 by way of example The connection of resistance thermometers Pt 100 with 4 wire connections floating ground measurement is shown below
218. hrome Nickel Aluminum to IEC 584 Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type L Thermocouples Iron Copper Nickel Constantan to DIN 43710 Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type N Thermocouples Nickel Chrome Silicium Nickel Silicium to IEC 548 1 Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type T Thermocouples Copper Copper Nickel to IEC 548 Part 1 Complement of Twos Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type U Thermocouples Copper Copper Nickel to DIN 43710 Complement of Twos Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern for SIMATIC 57 and ET 200B 4 8AI Possible Resolutions of Analog Values ET 200B 4 8Al Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI Measuring Ranges 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1000 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI for Resistance Measurement Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200 4 8 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4 812 6089
219. iagram of potential for the ET 200B 8DI 8DO and TB1 DC or TB3 DC ET 200B 8DI 8DO iV PROFIBUS DP 5 4V gt Logic 4 d 5V FIS Driver d 1 cp 1 1 i 1 1 1 8x 8x QO 0 7 10 0 7 11 13 X1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB1 DC or Station ni TB3 DC number selection Suppr logic STOP RUN Connection switch PROFIBUS DP M oj 111 L34 M Voltage o 5 b b sensor Ground ra 2 E 2 PE Screw for grounding 24 V see Seo 3 4 Outputs Inputs supply Figure 7 39 Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BH01 0XBO and TB1 DC or TB3 DC 7 50 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 8DI 8DO and TB1 4 DC ET 200B 8DI 8DO 7V PROFIBUS DP 5 4V gt Logic 4 5V Driver 1 1 Yl if a 8x 8 QO 0 7 10 0 7 1 L3 M X1 Interface between elec
220. ibuted Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 15 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior 3 4 Electrical Installation Introduction Next Sections 3 16 The ET 200B distributed I O station allows both grounded and ungrounded configurations The following two sections explain the configuration rules and give circuit examples for Grounded Configuration Ungrounded Configuration The numbers in the text cross reference the components shown in the figures ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior 3 4 1 Grounded Configuration Definition In a grounded configuration the reference potential of the ET 200B logic circuits and the protective ground conductor PE are galvanically intercon nected Rules You must note the following points for a grounded configuration You must provide a main switch 1 in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 for the ET 200B modules the signal sensors and the actuators Ifthe spur lines are a maximum of 3 m long and are ground fault resistant and short circuit proof the supply connection for the ET 200B and the load circuit requires no additional fuse 2 e Use Siemens load power supply unit 3 in the 6EV1 series Catalog ET 1 for supplying the 24 V DC to the ET 200B If you connect another load power supply unit 24 V DC please note that the voltage must be in the range 20 to 30 V including ripple The load power supply u
221. ical switches Wire lengths of the sensors e Unshielded 16 No 24 V DC 30 Vto5V 13 V to 30 V Typ 4 mA at 24 V Min 2 mA 2 0 to 3 5 ms Possible lt 1 5 mA Possible Max 100 m 328 ft Supply voltage for inputs sensor supply and internal logic Supply voltage L3 Rated value Permissible range Value for t lt 0 5 s Current consumption from L3 Logic e Sensors for inrush current 24 V DC 18 5 to 30 2 V 35V Typ 70 mA Max 500 mA lt 0 05 A s ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud Digital Modules 7 3 2 Electronics Blocks 200B 32DI 6 57 131 0BL00 0XBO and 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 32DI and ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms electronics blocks have the following characteristics e 32 inputs non floating Input voltage 24 V DC Input delay 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO0 3 ms 6ES7 131 0BL10 0X BO 0 2 ms e Suitable for switches and 2 3 wire proximity switches BEROs Possible terminal blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC TB4M DC Dimensional Draw Dimensional drawing for ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO and
222. ics e 24 inputs non floating e 8 outputs floating in groups of 8 Input voltage 24 V DC Input delay 6ES7 133 01 0 0 3 ms 6ES7 133 11 0 0 0 2 ms Load voltage 24 V DC Possible terminal blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC TB4M DC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 22 for the precise dimensions ing 00 0 24 5 10 DC24V 11 0C24V 12 0C24V E 0172 5455657 0 10 2 3544 5 6 7 00 4 2 35 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 5 4 5 6 7 id di 5 le a ds ho In h2 hs ha hs he Tz ha ha 22 25 bo l25 l26 l27 l28 l29 lso 31 l32 us 73 06 7 Topa p Vu a os ede be Yr jo e o Jer Jez eo ec be e o e oo e er e e ii s Jes pa 69 po 71 72 41 s 44 5 he 47 ha 5o 51 52 53 54 55 jse 57 59 jeo 62 jes 15 57 5 E 133 0BN01 0XBO Figure 7 47 Front Elevation ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0 01 0 0 and ET 200B
223. iguration for 24 V DC digital modules of the ET 200B TREO L2 oom ET 200B M 2 4 607 y o Sensor M L actuator Figure 3 11 Grounded Configuration for 24 V DC Digital Modules of the ET 200B ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Electrical Configu The following figure shows the grounded configuration for 120 230 V AC ration digital modules of the ET 200B 1 1 Li 5 2 2 L3 dd N PE i 2 x 5 E 5 0 8 ET 200B EN L1 N 6 AM Sensor 230 V AC actuator Figure 3 12 Grounded Configuration for 120 230 V Digital Modules of the ET 200B ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 19 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior 3 4 2 Ungrounded Configuration Definition In an ungrounded configuration there is no galvanic connection between the reference potential of the ET 200B logic circuits and the protective ground conductor PE Rules You must note the following points for an ungrounded configuration e You must provide a main switch 1 in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 for the ET 200B modules the signal sensors and the actuators If the spur lines are a maximum of 3 m long and are ground fault resistant and short circuit proof the supply connection for the ET 2
224. imit at 25 C in relation to input range e 80mV From 250 to 1000 mV Thermocouples Thermal resistors e Resistors Temperature error in relation to input range Linearity error in relation to input range Repeatability in steady state condition at 25 C in rela tion to input range Cable length Shielded 50 dB 50 dB 1 0 6 96 10K 5 1 0 6 96 0 4 96 7K 3K 0 6 0 005 K 0 05 0 05 Max 100 m 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 5 Electronics Block ET 200 4 6 57 134 0HF01 0XBO Characteristics Dimensional Draw ing The ET 200B 44AI electronics block has the following characteristics 4 inputs floating to the supply voltage of the internal logic Measuring ranges Voltage 1 25 V 2 5 V 5 V 10 V Current 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 20 mA Measuring principle successive approximation Supply voltage 24 V DC Connectable sensors Voltage sensors 2 wire connection Current sensors 2 wire connection Measured value range selection via COM ET 200 or STEP 7 or directly via parameterization telegram see Chapter 4 See Figure 8 4 for the precise dimensions RUN BF DIA
225. istributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 17 Analog Modules Connection of Voltage Sensors Floating Ground Measurement A A x 3 P 2 4 MA Qr 8 18 The channels can also be used to connect voltage sensors 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV 1000 mV Two voltage sensors per channel group can be connected Figures 8 13 and 8 14 show the two methods of connecting voltage sensors Two wire connection of voltage sensors floating ground measurement is shown below V V V Y V V K jos3lo4 1 3 1 4 MAL A K 0 1 0 2 71 412 a Shield y Sen A 24V fin ni ad 0 PI ue 1V Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC lt al el PE Ma Mexternal Figure 8 13 2 Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B 4 8AI Floating Ground Measurement Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage Vcw 1V must not be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Ground Referenced Mea surement 1 x 3 EET MA Qr ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Two wire connection of vo
226. it analog output module manufacturer ID master station number module class 5 20 module defect ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4 812 6089 02c mounting on a standard section rail 3 6 with shield connecting element 3 8 order numbers F 2 P parameterization error analog output module parameterization missin g 5 19 parameterization telegra C 2 analog ET 200B digital ET 200B parameterizing parameters ET 200B 4AQ 8 84 ET 200B 4 8AI ET 200B 4AI incorrect in module 5 19 parameterization telegra process alarm lost PROFIBUS DP interface 3 26 PROFIBUS DP dropline order number F 4 S S7 slavel 1 4 shield connecting element 3 2 3 3 3 25 shielding SINEC L2 DP 1 2 See also PROFIBUS DP slave diagnostics D 3 operation with IM 308 B D 4 slave diagnostics operation with IM 308 5 6 operation with 57 M7 DP ma or other PROFIBUS DP definition 5 5 device related diagnostics analog 5 18 device related diagnostics digita ID related diagnostics analog manufacturer ID 5 13 master station number requesting 5 10 station status 1 to 3 5 11 To Next 5 5 station number 1 5 Index 3 Index station status structure 5 11 type file A 2 applications designation 4 41 2 T old type files provision technical specifications 200B 16DI 7 19 ET 200B 24DI 8DO ET 200B 24DI 8DO 02ms U ET 200
227. l lows Table A 1 Designations of Type Files for Digital Modules Station Type Type File for Type File for COM ET 200 4 COM ET 200 Windows and STEP 7 B 16DI 510001 200 SI0001AX 200 B 32DI 510004 200 510004 200 B 18 32012 DP 2 51000 200 200 5000 200 200 B EM EET 200 _ o 200 510005 200 B 16DO 2A 510005 200 B 32D0 DP SIODTE200 200 510000 200 200 8DI 8DO _ a 200 _ 200 B 8DI 8DO HWA DP 510010 200 SIO010AE 200 B 1601 1600 E 24DI 3DO B 24DI 5DO 2 B 16DI AC 51000 200 200 51000 200 200 200 200 510019 200 510019 200 B 16DO AC 51001 200 51001 200 B 16RO AC SI001CTE 200 51001 200 B 8DI 8RO AC DP 51001 200 SI001DTX 200 1 These type files are valid for the digital modules described in this manual order num bers are listed in Appendix F even if the type files contain some order numbers of fully compatible predecessor modules 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Type Files and GSD Files Analog Modules The designations of the type files for the analog ET 200B modules are as fol lows Table A 2 Designations of Type Files for Analog Modules Station Type Type File for Type File for in COM ET 200 COM ET 200 V4 x COM ET 200 Windows and STEP 7 4 8 51801 ATE 200 B 4AI DP 518019 200 518019 200 4 DP 5
228. l 2 nel 3 Chan nel 4 2 1 2 2 Chan nel 5 2 3 2 4 Chan nel 6 3 0 3 1 Chan nel 7 3 3 3 4 x A start ad dress is as signed for the entire module addresses for 8 words are reserved In put data only in the words for channels 0 2 4 and 6 module ad dressing This configu ration is re jected as er rored Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 1 3 0 2 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 3 0 3 1 3 3 3 4 separate start address can be as signed for each channel Addresses are reserved for a 2x 1AI 2 maximum of 4 words single 1x IAI 9 as 1 channel ad dressing Length of user data X Connection of measuring lines o Connection of constant current lines ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 21 Analog Modules Example In this example voltage sensors and thermal resistors Pt 100 are connected Table 8 7 Example for Configuring the Input Areas of ET 200B 4 8AI uration Chan group 0 Chan group 1 Chan group 2 Chan group 3 Chan Chan Channel Chan Chan Chan Chan nel 0 nell nel3 nel4 nel5 nel6 0 1 0 3 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 0 3 3 0 2 0 4 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 4 31 3 4 6 voltage sensors and one Pt 100 thermal resistor 7 X Chan group 0 Channel 0
229. l Block TB4 DC Spring Latch Terminal ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 10 Digital Modules 7 2 7 Terminal Block TB4M DC 6ES7 193 0 0 0 Dimensional Draw Figure 7 13 is a dimensional drawing of the TB4M DC spring latch termi ing nal Fas sa en oe oe ee zmn ana eo fata faan feia oe 48 25 7 25 7 19 4 196 3 HH EIER SIEMENS 57 193 0CE30 0XRO 0 x 0 EN o 5 ii 090000 BP n S ep ps su re Be a gl 5 RUN STOP 5 N 3 IDIA LI LC E JE EIC YC XC 1L AC IL IL IL JI LA C E OE IE IE CC Mi D 1 J EH bid L t t Ho IL i i cp 1 7 E L 125 Figure 7 13 Dimensional Drawing Terminal Block TBAM DC Spring Latch Terminal Terminal Number Figure 7 14 is an enlargement of the terminal numbering printed on the ing TB4M DC spring latc
230. l Block TB8 and Bus Connector Dimensional Draw Figure 8 3 contains the dimensional drawings side elevation of the terminal ing block 8 with electronics block installed and two different bus connectors p 62 _ 52 50 60 1 1 Burn o000 o000 0000 Dada o000 OOOO Oooo OOOO o000 o000 20000 0000 OOOO 0000 o000 0000 M n 0000 g pu o000 SN eT B 6ES7 972 0BA10 0XBO B 6ES7 972 0BB10 0XBO SIEMENS SIEMENS 2 1472 Y Ae 5 5 2 1 51 8 61 8 4 Figure 8 3 Dimensional Drawing Side Elevation with Bus Connectors 6ES7 972 0BA10 0XAO0 and 6ES7 972 0BB10 0XA0 ET 200B Distributed Station 8 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 4 Electronics Block ET 200 4 8 6ES7 134 01 0 0 Characteristics The ET 200B 4 8AI electronics block has the following characteristics e 8 inputs in 4 channel groups galvanically isolated from voltage supply to the internal logic e Transducers supported Thermocouples types E J
231. l Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 16DI 16DO and TB2 4 DC ET 200B 16DI 16DO ZV PROFIBUS DP 5V 4V Logic pex E Al Dien 00000 uu vi P d 1 oy 10 0 7 8 8x P 16x 1 0 7 00 Q1 Tp 0 7 0 7 25 5 L1 1 12 2 1 Interface between electronics block and terminal block TB2 4 DC Station E EI number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN switch Connection Suppr Suppr PROFIBUS DP logic logic L14 M1 1 2 2 L5 5 5 ajo SuppyNoltage ay j Ground p e gt d d PEL Screw for grounding Digital Digital 24V see Sec 3 4 outputs inputs supply Figure 7 46 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 133 0BL00 0XBO and TB2 4 DC 7 64 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 16DI 16DO For the sake of clarity the table also sh
232. l blocks taking the TB1 4 DC by way of example Table 7 3 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 16DI 6ES7 131 0BH00 0XBO Terminal numbering TB1 4 DC 10 Input 0 internally jumpered 10 Input 1 connected to L3 I0 Input 2 I0 Input 3 10 4 21 Input PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw age internally jump connected to 34 I0 Input 22 I0 Input 23 I0 Input 24 Input 25 Il Input 26 Input 27 Il Input 28 Input 4 29 L1 not used 1 L3 Voltage supply Ground connection internal logic and sen sor voltage 24 V internal logic and sen L3 Voltage supply internal logic and sen sor voltage 24 V ET 200B Distributed I O Station sor voltage 7 18 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw Ground connection internal logic and sen sor voltage e E 1 TB1 4 DC only Digital Modules Important Note on Wiring Fuse
233. led in a type file directory recognized by the soft ware The names of the type files are listed in Appendix A 1 If you do not have a type file for ET 200B you can fetch the type file you need via modem The number to dial is 49 911 737972 You do not need a device master data file GSD file unless you are going to use ET 200B with a DP master that cannot process the type file The GSD file contains all the slave specific properties The format of the GSD file is defined in EN 50170 Part 3 The contents of the GSD files are described in Appendix You can order GSD file on diskette Order No 6ES7 190 1 00 0 or fetch it via modem The modem number to dial is 49 911 737972 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 4 3 Configuration and Parameterization Which Type File There are a number of type file versions for the ET 200B modules the ver sion you need depends on the parameterization software and the master The type file version is indicated by the seventh character in the type file name example SIxxxxAD 200 xxxx is the module s manufacturer ID The 8th character in the type file name indicates the language D German E English F French I Italian 5 Spanish X non language specific example SIxxxxAE 200 for an English type file The type file versions and their applications are listed in the table below Table 4 1 Type File Versions
234. lt 0 5 s 35 V Current consumption from L3 Logic Typ 70 mA Sensors Max 500 mA Pt for inrush current 0 05 A s Inputs Number of inputs 8 Galvanic isolation to inter No nal electronic circuits Input voltage Rated value 24 V DC For 0 signal 30 V to5 V For 1 signal 13 V to 30 V Outputs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation In groups of Output voltage For 0 signal For 1 signal Output current For 0 signal For 1 signal Delay of outputs From 0 to 1 From 1 to 0 Switching frequency e Resistive load Inductive load Lamp load Short circuit protection Load current Total current Lamp load Setting a digital input Limit of inductive cutoff voltage Cable length Max 2 V idle Min supply voltage 3 V Max 1 mA Max 0 5 A Approx 20 us Max 0 5 ms Max 100 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Max 8 Hz Yes 2 5 W Possible 11 55 V Max 100 m 328 ft noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules 7 3 8 Electronics Block ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6 57 133 0BH10 0XBO characteristics The ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA electronics block has the following characteris tics e 8 inputs non floating e 8 outputs non floating The outputs be deactivated by a pro
235. ltage sensors ground referenced measurement is shown below V Ac AC TB8 lt I lt I lt 1 y y V 105041 11 31 4 L K 70 1102h 71 412 Y Shield shield 24 Wu B O 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC a Lima i PE Mexternal Figure 8 14 2 Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B 4 8AI Ground Referenced Measurement 8 19 Analog Modules 8 4 2 Configuration Options Type File Configuration for Voltage Sensors Thermocouples Table 8 5 Confi gura tion SAI The information in this section applies to the type file SI801ABE 200 The type file contains the possible configurations The configuration you choose depends on the wiring of the module Table 8 5 shows the possible configurations of the ET 200B 4 8AI with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 for connecting voltage sensors and ther mocouples Table 8 5 lists only the slots for configuring the input areas slots 4 to 11 Slots 1 to 3 have the default value 004 Possible Configurations for the Input Areas of ET 200 4 8 1 with only Voltage Sensors and Ther mocouples Connected Terminals used Meaning Channel group
236. m that you may need in conjunction with ET 200B Table F 4 Accessories for the ET 200 Distributed I O System Accessory Order Number RS 485 repeater PROFIBUS DP IP 20 6ES7 972 0 A00 0XA0 Bus connectors without programmer adapter max 12 MB 6 57 972 0BA10 0XA0 with programmer adapter max 12 MB 6ES7 972 0BB10 0XA0 without programmer adapter without terminating 6ES7 972 0BA30 0XA0 resistor max 1 5 MB Bus cables Normal 6XV1 830 0AH10 Drum 830 3 10 Underground 6XV1 830 3AH10 Repeater adapters 6 510 1AA00 Optical link modules for fiber optic waveguides 6 502 3 00 6 502 4 00 PROFIBUS DP dropline 6ES7 901 4BD00 0XA0 ET 200B Distributed Station F 4 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Order Numbers Manuals for ET 200 in SIMATIC S5 Table F 5 In order to program and start up an ET 200B with COM ET 200 you will need one of the manuals listed in Table F 5 Manuals for ET 200 in SIMATIC S5 Manual ET 200 Distributed I O System 6 55 988 3ES 1 ET 200 Distributed I O System 6 55 988 3ES 2 Manuals for STEP 7 and SI MATIC S7 Contents Description of the IM 308 B master interface for S5 115U S5 135U and 85 1550 Use of COM 200 V4 x Description of the IM 308 C master interface for S5 115U S5 135U and 85 1550 Description of the 855 950 with PROFIBUS DP master interface Use of COM ET 200 Windows Working with the FB IM308C In or
237. me of the characteristics of ET 200B The plastic used for the housing has high fire resistance deriving from halogen free flame resistance e aser labeling i e no externally applied labels Plastics bear identification markings to DIN 54840 e Compact design so materials outlay is low number of components is minimized by integration in ASICs On account of the low pollutant make up ET 200B is suitable for recycling For environmentally compatible recycling and disposal of your old SIMATIC equipment please contact Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Technische Dienstleistungen ANL A 44 Kreislaufwirtschaft Postfach 32 40 D D 91052 Erlangen Phone 49 91 31 7 3 33 19 Fax 4 49 9 31 7 2 66 43 This Siemens office offers comprehensive and flexible disposal backed by individual consulting at fixed prices Once the equipment has been disposed of you receive disassembly records stating the material fractions and the cor responding identification records for the materials ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Introduction There are a number of digital modules for connecting sensors transducers or actuators loads In this Chapter This chapter contains the technical data the dimensional drawings and the block diagrams for the ET 200B digital modules Terminal Blocks 7 3 Electronics Blocks 7 14 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 1 Digital Modules 7
238. ment 8 16 Connection of Resistance Thermometers Pt 100 with 4 Wire Connections Ground Referenced Measurement 8 17 2 Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B 4 8Al Floating Ground Measurement 2 Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B 4 8Al Ground Referenced Measurement Block Diagram ET 200B 4 8Al and TB8 Front Elevation ET 200 Two Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200B 4AlI Floating Ground Measurement 8 55 Two Wire Connection of Voltage Sensors to ET 200 4 Ground Referenced Measurement 8 56 Two Wire Connection of Current Sensors Floating Ground Measurement 8 57 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Contents 8 20 8 21 8 22 C 3 4 5 C 6 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 D 1 D 2 E 1 E 2 Two Wire Connection of Current Sensors Ground Referenced Measurement Connection of 2 Wire Measuring Transducer as Current Sensor Connection of 4 Wire Measuring Transducer as Current Sensor or Voltage Sensor Block Diagram ET 200B 4Al and TB8 Front Elevation ET 200B 4
239. mod ule Bytes 13 to 16 Table E 4 shows the structure and contents of bytes 13 to 16 Table E 4 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics Alarm Byte Bit Meaning Remark Oto Channel type 4 8 4 7 73g 4 Oto Number of diagnostics bits output per 08g 4 8AL 4AL 4AO T channel by a module 15 Oto Number of channels of a module 04H 7 08g 4 8AI Channel error vector 16 0 Channel error channel 0 4 8 1 Channel error channel 1 4 8 4AO 2 Channel error channel 2 4 8 4 4AO 3 1 The number of bytes depends on the number of channels in the module 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c E 5 Analog Modules and Old Type Files Analog Channel Table E 5 shows the assignment of the diagnostics byte for an analog input or analog output channel Table E 5 Diagnostics Byte for an Analog Input Analog Output Channel Byte Bit Analog Input Channel 4 8 Analog Output Channel 4 4AD 0 Configuration parameterization error 1 Common mode error 4 8AI only 0 Reserved 2 0 Reserved asof 3 0 Reserved Ground short circuit 17 4 Wire break feed current monitoring measuring transducer Pt 100 5 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 6 Measuring range undershoot 0 Reserved 7 Measuring range overshoot 0 Reserved the case of the ET 200 4 8 a wire break error is superimposed on c
240. n from 13 Logic e Sensors for the inrush current 24 V DC 18 5 30 2 V 35 V Typ 70 mA Max 500 mA lt 0 05 A s Inputs Number of inputs Galvanic isolation to inter nal electronic circuits Input voltage Rated value For 0 signal For 1 signal 24 V DC 30 5 13 30 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Inputs continued Input current for 1 signal Delay of inputs Connection of 2 wire BERO Quiescent current Connection of mechanical switches Cable length of sensors e Unshielded Outputs Number of outputs Galvanic isolation In groups of Output voltage For 0 signal For 1 signal Output current For 0 signal For 1 signal Delay of outputs From 0 to 1 From 1 to 0 By hardware cutoff Switching frequency Resistive load Inductive load Lamp load Short circuit protection Load current e Total current Lamp load Setting a digital input Limit of inductive cutoff voltage Cable length Typ 4 mA at 24 V Min 2 mA 3 ms Possible lt 1 5 mA Possible Max 100 m 328 ft Max 2 V idle Min supply voltage 3 V Max 1 mA 0 5 A 50 us Typ 100 us 3ms Max 100 Hz Max 0 5 Hz Max 8 Hz Yes 2 Max 5 W Possible 11 55 V Max 100 m 328 ft noperation with
241. nd L KH 000C station status 2 response monitoring active no error BEC JC FBx Evaluate error in FBx The analog modules of ET 200B support the following alarms Diagnostics alarm Process alarm In order to evaluate diagnostics alarms and process alarms via the device re lated diagnostics with the IM 308 C it is important to bear the following in mind Note In your STEP5 application program you must regularly query the corre sponding bits in the device related diagnostics in order to ensure that alarms are not overwritten by subsequent alarms With regard to the bus runtime for the PROFIBUS DP you must allow for the fact that the bits are queried at least once parallel to the bus runtime The structure of slave diagnostics for operation with IM 308 C is described in Sections 5 3 3 td 5 3 8 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 7 Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 2 General Information on Slave Diagnostics Operation with S7 M7 DP Masters STEP 7 or Other PROFIBUS DP Masters Diagnostics with S7 M7 DP Masters Diagnostics with Other PROFIBUS DP Masters Diagnostic Alarm and Process Alarm Structure of Slave Diagnostics 5 8 If you operate the ET 200B as a DP slave with a SIMATIC S7 M7 DP mas ter the ET 200B modules function like central 57 300 I O modules You read out diagnostics data records 0 and 1 with SFC 13 DPNRM For information on
242. nd ratings of the protective elements must be dimensioned to suit the size and type of load e Voltage surge protectors of this kind extend the service life of the relay contacts ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 87 Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions and TB W x Hx D The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 16RO AC is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes 500 V DC to logic 1500 V AC to connection terminals 20 W 814 g 29 oz 235 x 130 x 60 mm 9 17 x 5 09 x 2 34 in Diagnostics functions Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring Status of outputs Supply voltage L1 Rated value Permissible range Frequency Current consumption from L1 Tn operation with the 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud 7 88 Green RUN LED Red BF LED No No Green LEDs Supply voltage for internal logic 120 230 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz Typ 210 mA Relay outputs Number of outputs High current Low current Galvanic isolation e n groups of Short circuit protection Relay type Output voltage Rated value P
243. ndard sectional rail Coding connectors You use the coding connectors to set the wiring of the 8 for analog value processing 5 screw for connecting PE PROFIBUS DP interface Switch for setting the station number the station number is valid only after operation of the STOP RUN switch STOP RUN 2 3 Technical Description 2 2 Design of the Electronics Block Design Principle Coding 2 4 types of electronics block are built on the same design principle which is explained below using the ET 200B 16DI electronics block as a typical ex ample 6 n L 1 SIEMENS 5 L 1 5 i Ed 13y 08H00 0XB0 4 3 2 Figure 2 3 200B 16DI Electronics Block Ventilation slots Screws for mounting the electronics block on the terminal block Printed schematic diagram N Indication of the coding slide switch setting on the top of the terminal block 5 Labeling strip for indicating the status of the inputs or outputs in the case of digital electronics bl
244. nit must generate a functional low voltage with safe elec trical isolation in accordance with DIN VDE 0106 In the case of non sta bilized load power supply units you require a back up capacitor rating 200 uF per 1 A load current Provide a detachable connection to the protective ground conductor 4 in the secondary circuit of the load power supply unit M terminal e A fuse 5 is required for fusing the supply voltage For both grounded and ungrounded configurations the PE terminal amp of the ET 200B must have a low impedance connection to the protective ground conductor or the cabinet ground machine parts 6 e Use minimum cross section of 4 mm and a maximum of 10 mm for equipotential bonding and ground connections e All machine parts must be grounded The PROFIBUS DP interface of terminal blocks release 2 and later is ungrounded ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 17 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Connecting the Reference Poten tial of the Logic Circuits to PE Electrical Configu ration 3 18 For a grounded configuration you must also do the following at the digital terminal blocks 1 Connect the PE terminal to the lower screw 2 Tighten the upper screw The upper screw connects the ground potential to PE Figure 3 10 Both Screws Tightened in a Grounded Configuration The following figure shows the grounded conf
245. nostics alarm Slot of module with pro Slot of module cess alarm 4 with diagnostics 4 Byte 12 004 reserved 00 reserved Bytes 13 to Byte 16 Byte 28 Process alarm data Diagnostics alarm data see Table 5 8 see Tables 5 810 5 10 Figure 5 9 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 10 to 28 Bytes 13 to 16 Table 5 8 shows the structure and contents of bytes 13 to 16 Table 5 8 Bytes 13 to 16 for Diagnostics and Process Alarms Byte 10 015 Diagnostics Alarm Byte 10 02y Process Alarm Module defect Channel 0 Upper limit value over End of shoot 4 8AI 4AT cycle alarm Internal error Channel 1 Upper limit value over shoot 4 8AI 13 2 External error Channel 2 Upper limit value over shoot 4 8AI 4 Tab 3 Channel error Channel 3 Reserved Pa 4 Reserved Channel 4 Reserved 5 Reserved Channel 5 Reserved 6 Parameterization missing Channel 6 Reserved 7 Incorrect parameters in module Channel 7 Reserved For the ET 200B 4 8AI only the combination of single channel addressing and parameterization of channel group 0 for resistance measurement Pt 100 Ni 100 R entails display of Upper lower limit value overshoot for channel 1 In all other cases i e module addressing and single channel addressing and parameterization of channel group 0 for other than resistance measurement Pt 100 Ni 100
246. nt measurement Channel not activated 10V 5V 2 5V 1 25 V 20 mA 0 20 mA 4 20 MA Representation of measured values Measured value representation Default ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Sets representation of the analog mea sured values for module Sets data format for analog value repre sentation SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC 55 SIMATIC 57 Complement of twos Amount with sign Binary E 9 Analog Modules and Old Type Files Parameters for Table 8 58 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200 4 ET 200B 4AO with COM ET 200 Windows You can set these parameters for the ET 200B 4A0 if you use the type file SI8018AE 200 Table E 9 Parameters for ET 200 4 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO Parameter Explanation Explanation Diagnostics enable for channel 0 Diagnostics messages enabled sepa Disable 212217777 rately for each channel Enable Diagnostics enable for channel 1 Diagnostics enable for channel 2 Diagnostics enable for channel 3 Output type and range for channel 0 Type and range of output defined sepa rately for each channel Output type and range for channel 1 For voltage output Output type and range for channel 2 For current output Output type and range for channel 3 Representation of output values Sets representation of the analog values SIMATIC S5 for module SIMATIC S7 Default ET 200B Distributed Station E
247. number of diagnostics bytes SYNC capability etc Each ET 200B station type has its own type file which is generated by Sie mens forms a component part of COM ET 200 version 4 1 and later or is supplied with the manual A break in the lines to a sensor or a fault in the sensor itself ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Glossary 7 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Index A accessories order numbers ADC DAC error 5 20 analog value representation SIMATIC 57 ET 200B 4 8AL 8 26 8 ET 200 4 ET 200B 4AI analog value representation SIMATIC S5 ET 200B 4 8AI 8 26 ET 200 4 8 85 200B 4AI bus cable order bus connecto bus interface certification 6 3 certification 6 3 d channel error 5 19 channel ERE 530 0 channel type coding plugs 3 98 23 8 62 8 83 coding slide switch COM ET 200 V4 x D 1 common mode error analog output module conductor cross sections 3 23 configuration grounded 3 17 ungrounded configuration error analog output module 5 21 configuration b a analog ET WAE digital d configuring 4 1 4 ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4 812 6089 02c connecting loads ET 200B 4AO connecting transducers ET 200B 4 8A1 8 7 ET 200B 4AI D device related diagnostics analog ET 200B digital ET 200B diagnostics o
248. ny rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited 8 32 ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Measuring Range The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Type J Thermo ues for Type J thermocouples couples Table 8 18 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type J Ther mocouple Iron Copper Nickel Constantan to IEC 584 Complement of Twos Units Thermal Tempera e m f ture in C in mV Overflow Overrange Nominal range oc oc ccc co OL AER EU OX Overrange Overflow 1 0 Wire break For a reference temperature of 0 32 2 In the overrange any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 33 Analog Modules Measuring Range Type K Thermo The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type K thermocouples couples Table 8 19 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type K Ther mocouples Nickel Chrome Nickel Aluminum to IEC 584 Complement of Twos Units Thermal Tempera X F OV e m f ture in in mV 15141312 11109 8 76 543 ZE
249. o Baud supp Yes Software settable station Set Slave Add supp No number Length of user specific data User Prm Data Len see AppendixC parameterization telegram User specific data User Prm Data see Appendix C parameterization telegram Modular station Modular Station No 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c A 9 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuration Telegram Applicability In this Chapter If you use configuration software such as COM ET 200 or STEP 7 you can ignore this chapter If you address ET 200B modules via a configuration telegram for example with CP 5431 as DP master you can consult this chapter for details of how to structure the configuration telegram for the various types of ET 200B mod ule ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c B 1 Configuration Telegram Structure for Digi The configuration telegram for digital modules consists of 2 bytes ia Moguls The structure of the configuration telegram for digital ET 200B modules is as follows Table B 1 Structure of the Configuration Telegram for Digital ET 200B Modules Slot 1 Output area of the digital module byte 0 See Table B 2 Slot 2 Input area of the digital module byte 1 IDs for Digital Table B 2 contains all IDs hexadecimal for the digital ET 200B modules ET 200B Table B 2 IDs for Digital ET 200B Modules Address Address Scope
250. ock TB6 AC for ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC 6ES7 133 0HH00 0XBO Terminal numbering TB6 AC 5 6 7 8 9110 1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19120 21 22 23 24 25126 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 6411 LI 65 66 67 68 69 70 72 73174 75 7677 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89190 91 92 93 94 95 SEIN N Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 10 Input 0 Sensor voltage 1L1 for channel Sensor voltage 1N for channel 2 10 Input 1 I0 0 to 3 66 I0 0 to 3 10 Input 2 67 10 Input 3 not used not used not used not used not used 72 not used not used 4 not used 73 not used not used Sensor voltage 2L1 for channel Sensor voltage 2N for channel 75 Wl Ww CO Ww Ww 9 0 11 12 not used 13 10 Input 4 14 10 Input 5 15 10 Input 6 16 10 Input 7 17 QO Output 0 1 18 QO Output 1 0 19 QO Output 1 1 0 Q0 Output 2 0 2 00 Output 2 1 22 QO Output 3 0 Sot used I0 4 to 7 I0 4 to 7 76 80 BR AH nn RR Oo bd 00 Output 0 0 not used CA 1 2 notused 3 not used N 8 8 8 84 not used 85 not used e psa 25 not used 57 not used 89 not used BR Ww not used E H 23 E N ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4
251. ocks with LEDs 6 LEDs for e Voltage supply to the logic circuits RUN e Bus fault BF Group diagnostics short circuit wire break or load voltage failure DIA only for electronics blocks which can be diagnosed Load voltage monitor L1 L2 L3 L4 depending on the elec tronics block see Sectio The electronics blocks are coded by the manufacturer Some types of electronics blocks have a recess at the bottom This recess ensures that the terminal block is assigned safely to the correct electronics block 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installation In the Chapter This chapter contains information on In Section you will find on Page 3 2 Installing the Electronics Block 3 3 Dismantling the Terminal Block and Electronics Block 3 5 Wiring the Terminal Block 3 6 Wiring the Bus Interface 3 26 Technical Data You will find a detailed description of the technical data of the ET 200B modules in Sections 6 7nd 8 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 1 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior 3 1 Installing and Setting the Terminal Block Two Methods You can install the terminal block either e ona standard sectional rail 35 15 mm or 35 x 7 5 mm to DIN EN 50022 Or onsmooth surfaces i e direct wall mounting for dimensions of the mounting holes see Dimensional Drawings in Sections 7 and 8 Small Electronics Figure 3 1
252. ocouples Table 8 33 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type L Thermocouples Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range Type L Overrange Nominal range If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs the analog input module signals underrun when 80 is undershot and outputs 8000 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Measuring Range Type N Thermo couples Measuring Range Type T Thermo couples The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type N thermocouples Table 8 34 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type N Thermocouples Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range in C N gt 1550 1 32767 7 Overflow 1550 0 15500 Overrange 1300 1 13001 1300 0 13000 Nominal range 270 0 2700 lt 270 1 2701 573 Underrange If wiring is incorrect or a sensor error in the negative range occurs the analog input module signals underrun when FOC4y is undershot and outputs 8000 The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type T thermocouples Table 8 35 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type T Thermocouples Temperature Decimal Hexadecimal Range Range in C Type T 2 540 1
253. og Output Module 4AO ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c C 11 Parameterization Telegram Bytes 22 to 35 by setting the corresponding bit to 1 Figure C 10 shows the structure of bytes 22 to 35 You activate a parameter Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 Byte 28 Byte 29 Byte 30 Byte 31 Byte 32 Byte 33 Byte 34 Byte 35 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Diagnostics alarm enable 3210 Dummy value keep last value Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel Channel 3 4 3 0 Output Output type 2 Output channel 0 Output channel 1 Output channel 2 Output channel 3 range High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte A T See Tabl C 5 0 Dummy value 1 Keep last value gt Dummy value channel 0 gt Dummy value channel 1 gt Dummy value channel 2 gt Dummy value channel 3 Figure C 10 Bytes 22 to 35 for Analog Output Module 4AO Note Representation of the dummy values corresponds to analog value representa tion Bear the applicable range limits in mind when setting the dummy val ues C 12 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Parameterization Telegram Type of Output Table C 5 lists all output ranges of the analog output mo
254. ommon mode and measuring range errors occurring atthe same time common mode and mea suring range errors are not signaled ET 200B Distributed Station E 6 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules and Old Type Files E 3 Configuration Options Type File The information in this section applies to the type file SIxxxxAE 200 IDs Table E 6 shows the possible IDs for configuring analog modules with COM ET 200 Windows Single channel addressing is not possible with the type SIxxxxAE 200 Table E 6 Possible IDs for Configuring Input and Output and Areas ET 200B 4 8AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 CAEN Word channels are All channels are transferred 1 200B 4AI 6 87 134 0 0 4 Word channels ET200B 4AO 6ES7 135 0HF01 0XBO 4 4 channels are transferred 1 The address assigned is the start address for the entire module ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c E 7 Analog Modules and Old Type Files E 4 Parameters for Analog Modules Parameters for ET 200B 4 8Al Table 8 9 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B 4 8AI with COM ET 200 Windows You can set these parameters for the ET 200B 4 8AT if you use the type file SIS01A A E 200 Table E 7 Parameter Diagnostics enable for channel group 0 channels 0 1 Diagnostics enable for channel group 1 channels 2 3 Diagnostics enable for channel group 2 c
255. on in groups of 4 Channel group 0 corresponds to QO outputs 0 7 Potential group 0 corresponds to QO outputs O 3 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 15 Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 7 Structure of ID related Diagnostics Analog ET 200B Introduction Header Byte 6 ID related Diag nostics Bytes 7 8 5 16 ID related diagnostics shows which module in which slot is defective The header indicate the length of ID related diagnostics see Figure 5 2 bytes 6 to 8 Analog ET 200B modules have the value 43g in the Header ID related diagnostics byte 7 0 Bit No Byte 6 o 1 o o o o 1 1 VM v 2 Length of ID related diagnostics incl byte 6 3 bytes Code for ID related diagnostics Figure 5 5 Structure of the Header ID related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Byte 6 The ID related diagnostics of analog ET 200B modules consists of two bytes see Figure 5 2 7 3 0 Bit No 1 0 0 0 Module in slot 4 defective 084 Byte 7 7 0 Bit No 0 Byte 8 Figure 5 6 Structure of ID related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 7 8 Note Irrespective of the configuration of the analog ET 200B module slots 4 to 11 slot 4 is always flagged as defective in a diagnostics message
256. on time Approx 17 5 8 49 Analog Modules Inputs continued Measuring principle Integration conversion time resolution per channel Parameterizable Integration time in ms Basic conversion time incl integration time and offset measuring time in ms or Additional conversion time for wire break mon itoring in ms Resolution in bits incl overrange e Noise suppression for in terference frequency f1 in Hz Permissible potential differ ence Across inputs Inputs to MA Ucm e Ma to PEor M Error message in the event of Range overshoot over range Wire break of signal sen sor lines Noise suppression for f n fl 1 90 f1 interference frequency Common mode interfer ence Uss 3 V Series mode interference peak value of interfer ence rated value of in put range 8 50 Integrating Yes 2 5 167 20 100 8 35 42 200 10 10 10 10 9 12 12 14 SI SI SI SI 400 60 50 10 Max 1 Max 1 V Max 75 V DC 60 V AC Yes Yes for Pt 100 Ni 100 R 80 mV Type E J K L N T U thermo couples parameteriz able gt 70 dB gt 40 dB Inputs continued Crosstalk between inputs 50 gt At 60 Hz Working error limit over en tire temperature range in relation to input range e 80mV From 250 to 1000 mV Thermocouples Thermal resistors e Resistors Basic error limit working er ror l
257. operating mode of the ET 200B 4 8AI electronics block by means of the coding plugs on the TB8 terminal block and by means of the COM 200 or STEP7 parameterization software The coding plugs of the TB8 enable you to set the input circuit of the 8 for analog value measurement of each individual channel group of the ET 200B 4 8AI in accordance with the measured value sensor connected and the desired mode of measurement The possible settings of the coding plugs are A B C and D For details of the relationships between the settings of the coding plugs and the mode of measurement and the measured value sensors see Sectio Section 3 1 describes how to change the settings of the coding plugs Some parameters of the ET 200B 4 8AI listed on the following pages apply only to individual channel groups Table 8 8 lists the assignment of 8 ter minals to channel groups Table 8 8 Assignment of Terminals to Channel Groups Channel Group Terminals Channel group 0 Terminals 0 1 0 2 Terminals 0 3 0 4 Terminals 1 1 1 2 Terminals 1 3 1 4 Terminals 2 1 2 2 Terminals 2 3 2 4 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 Terminals 3 1 3 2 Terminals 3 3 3 4 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 23 Analog Modules Parameters Table 8 9 shows all the parameters for parameterizing the ET 200B 4 8AI with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 You can set these parameters f
258. or the ET 200B 4 8AT if you use the type file SI801ABE 200 Table 8 9 Parameters for ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0 01 0 0 Parameter Explanation Value Range Diagnostics alarm Diagnostics alarm enable for module Disable Enable End of cycle alarm End of cycle alarm enable for module Disable Enable Limit value alarm Limit value alarm enable for module Disable Diagnostics enable for channel group 0 Diagnostics messages enabled sepa Disable Diagnostics enable for channel group 1 con cach channel Enable Diagnostics enable for channel group 2 Diagnostics enable for channel group 3 Wire break monitoring enable for Wire break monitoring enabled Disable channel group 0 separately for each channel group Enable lano Le iij only for resistance thermometers Pt 100 Ni 100 thermocouples resis tors and voltage sensors 80 mV Wire break monitoring enable for channel group 1 Wire break monitoring enable for channel group 2 Wire break monitoring enable for channel group 3 Integration time for channel group 0 Enter an optimum integration time for 2 5 ms ale the A D converter to help suppress 16 7 ms Integration time for channel group 1 noise voltage 20 ms Integration time for channel group 2 100 ms Integration time for channel group 3 ET 200B Distributed Station 8 24 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Table 8 9 Parameters for ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0 01
259. ors are not signaled ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 21 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c General Technical Specifications What are General Technical Specifi cations The general technical specifications comprise the standards that all ET 200B modules satisfy the test values they comply with and the criteria used to test all modules General Technical Specifications Climatic environ conditions acc to IEC 1131 2 Operating temperature e Preferred installation 60 32 to 140 horizontal installa e tion on a vertical wall see Figure 3 8 2 Other installation posi 0 to 40 32 to 104 F tions Air intake temperature measured at the bottom of the module 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 The table below contains the general technical specifications of the ET 200B modules Mechanical environmental conditions Vibration tested to IEC 68 2 6 10 Hz lt f lt 57 Hz Const amplitude 0 075 mm Const acceleration 1g Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave min 57 Hz lt f lt 150 Hz Mode of vibration Period of oscillation 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 per pendicular axes Storage transport temperature In accordance with Relative humidity to DIN 40040 Atmospheric pressure Operating Storage transport Pollutants 15 to 95 indoor no condensation 795 to 1080 hPa 660
260. ostics enable wire break channel group 0 Diagnostics enable wire break channel group 1 Diagnostics enable wire break channel group 2 Diagnostics enable wire break channel group 3 Figure C 6 Bytes 15 and 16 for Analog Input Modules 4 8AI 4AI ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Parameterization Telegram Bytes 22 to 35 setting the corresponding bit to 1 Figure C 7 shows the structure of bytes 22 to 35 You activate a parameter by Note Representation of the limit values corresponds to analog value representa tion Always bear the limit ranges in mind when setting the limit values Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 Byte 28 Byte 29 Byte 30 Byte 31 Byte 32 Byte 33 Byte 34 Byte 35 2 0 010 Limit value alarm enable End of cycle alarm 4 8Al Diagnostics alarm enable 7654321 0 Integration time 4 8Al only Vue AAT byte 23 00H Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 See Table C 2 7 4 3 Channel group 3 0 Measurement channel Measurement channel Measurement channel Measurement channel group group group 0 1 2 group 3 PD Measurement range Measurement type See Table High byte Upper limit value Low byte channel 0 Hig
261. ower limit values for each 0 channel 32768 32767 0 32768 32767 0 32768 32767 0 32768 32767 Default 8 64 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 5 4 Analog Value Rep resentation SI MATIC S7 Analog Value Rep resentation Sl MATIC S5 Table 8 41 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S5 If you operate the ET 200B 4AI with SIMATIC 55 you can utilize the ana log value representation of SIMA 7 higher measured value resolution max 14 bits sign See Sectio or the measured value tables for ana log value representation in SIMATIC 57 Analog values can be represented in three data formats with the ET 200B 4AT e 12 bit complement of twos representation range 2048 to 2047 units e 11 bit amount and 1 bit sign range 2048 to 2047 units e 12 bit binary number range 0 to 4095 units The table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B 4AI Representation of an Analog Input Value as a Bit Pattern 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 fame dT TT OTe 29 28 27 26 25 24 Analog value representation High Byte 15 SI 2 210 Supplementary Bits Bits 0 to 2 and bit 15 have no significance for the amount of the measured value See Table 8 42 for a detailed description of these bits Bits 0 to 2 and bit 15 have the following meaning in the bit pattern of the analog inp
262. ows Byte 9 Table D 5 Possible Values for Byte 9 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Meaning m fofofo po quee SC S 03g 83g 0 Internal error no channel error incorrect parameters in the module OBg 8By 1 Internal error channel error incorrect parameters in the module 1 OF y 8 1 1 1 1 Summation error of all the above errors incorrect parameters in the mod ule Bytes 13 to 15 Table D 6 shows the structure and contents of bytes 13 to 15 Table D 6 Diagnostics Data Bytes 13 to 15 Byte Bit Meaning Remark Channel type 4 8 13 4 14 Number of diagnostics bits output per 08g 4 8 4AO channel by module H 15 Number of channels of a module 04 4 4AO 08 4 8AI ET 200B Distributed Station D 10 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x D 3 Configuration Options IDs Table D 7 shows the possible IDs for configuring the ET 200B modules with COM 200 V4 x The following address IDs are possible for ET 200B Table D 7 IDs for ET 200B Module Order Number Address ID Consist Address Address ency Scope Area Bytes o ET 200B 16DI 6ES7 131 0BH00 0XBO 00 017 Byte 2 digital ET 200B 32DI 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO 000 digital ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0BH01 0XBO 033 2 digital ET 200 16 2 6ES7 132 0BH11 0XBO 033 2 digital ET 200B 32D
263. ows the termi nal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB2 4 DC by way of exam ple Table 7 12 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and TB4M DC for ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 133 0BL00 0XBO Terminal numbering TB2 4 DC 1213 1415 6 718 9 10 i 12 13 14 I5 16 17 1R 19 20 21122 23 4 5 6 27 78 79 30 31 3 33 34 35 136 37 38 1321401 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 150151152153 54155 56 57 58 5916061162 63 64 Lo L5 65 66 67 68 6E 70 71 72 73 4 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 189190 91 92 93 94 95 96 M5 MS Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 4 eo eojop oooosooosoooooooo EECA E ECEE CO CO KACI ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Voltage supply L1 for channel group QO 0 to 7 Voltage supply L2 for channel group QI 0 to 7 24 V sensor voltage internally jumpered connected to L5 Ground supply M1 for channel group QO 0 to 7 Ground supply 2 for channel group QO 0 to 7 Ground sensor volt age internally jump ered connected to M5 PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw 7 65 Digital Modules Table 7 12 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC and TB4M DC for ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 133 0BL00 0X
264. pensating box for the entire module ground referenced surement measurement 3 1 2 4 M 4C TB8 Vy lt I o gt oS gt K4 0 5 04 1 3 14 L D Ma K 0 1021 1 1 1 2 o 2 Shield X euis erc a 24V 94 9 94 9 box Thermal link V Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC 4 PE Ma Mexternal Figure 8 8 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box Ground Referenced Measurement 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 13 Analog Modules Connection of Resistance Ther mometers Resistors 2 Wire Connection Floating Ground Measurement B 8 14 If resistance thermometers or resistors are connected resistance can be mea sured by means of a 2 wire connection The resistance thermometer resistor receives a constant current supply via terminals x 1 and x 2 Voltage drops on the measuring lines may falsify the results This type of measurement is useful if the measuring lines are short and thick or when the requirements for measuring accuracy are low Figures 8 9 and 8 10 show the two methods of connecting resistance ther mometers and resistors in a 2 wire connection taking a Pt 100 by way of example A maximum of 4 resistance thermometers Pt 100 Ni 100 or resis tors can be connected The connection of resistance thermometers Pt 1
265. peration with IM 308 5 6 operation with S7 M7 DP masters or other PROFIBUS DP masters device related diagnostics analog device related diagnostics digital ID related diagnostics analog manufacturer ID master station number operation with IM 308 B D slave diagnostics station status 1 to 3 5 11 dismantling 3 14 E electronics block characteristics definition error ADC DAC EPROM 5 20 error diagnostics by LEDs 5 3 slave pael ET 200B Index 1 Index ET 200B 16DI block diagram 7 16 characteristics pin assignment 7 18 technical data 7 19 ET 200B 16DI AC block diagram characteristics block diagram 7 characteristics block WEE Cors characteristics 7 79 block diagram characteristics characteristics 7 84 pin assignment 7 8 technical data ET 200B 24DI 8DO ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms block diagram characteristics pin assignment technical data ET 200B 32DI ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms block diagram characteristics 7 20 pin assignment 7 23 technical data ET 200B 32DO block diagram characteristics pin assignme technical data Index 2 ET 200B 4 8AI analog value representation SIMATIC 55 18 26 analog value representation SIMATIC S7 8 39 39 characteristics connecting transducers 8 7 parameters 8 24 possible WII schematic cir i technical data ET 200B 4AI an
266. r an analog ET 200B shows you the error reported by the ET 200B The header indicates the length of device related diagnostics see Figure 5 2 bytes 9 to 28 Note Chapter 8 contains a discussion of Supplementary Bits in the section deal ing with analog value representation these bits contain additional diagnos tics information The structure of the device related diagnostics for configuration of analog modules with the latest type file version SIxxxxBE 200 is described below If you configure with the type file SIxxxxAE 200 please turn to Appendix E 2 The analog ET 200B modules contain the following information in the Header device related diagnostics byte 7 0 Bit No Byte 9 0 0 JN P n Length of device related diagnostics incl byte 9 depending on number of channels used ODy 144 4 8Al 13 to 20 bytes ODy 104 4Al 4AO 13 to 16 bytes 08 process alarm for 4 8 4Al Code for device related diagnostics Figure 5 8 Structure of the Header Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Byte 9 ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics Device Related Device related diagnostics of the analog ET 200B modules comprises a max Diagnostics imum of 19 bytes Byte 10 01 Code for diagnostics alarm 02 Code for process alarm Byte 11 Process alarm Diag
267. ranges 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV and 1000 mV Table 8 26 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI Measuring Ranges 80 mV 250 mV 500 mV and 1000 mV Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring Units h CA CREME cimal 94 071 1 17588 32511 JEFF Overrange 80 003 1 00004 6 01 80 000 60 000 Nominal range 60 000 80 000 80 003 Underrange 94 074 94 077 lt 293 99 587 98 lt 1 17596 32768 80004 200B Distributed Station 8 40 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Measuring Range Resistance Mea surement Table 8 27 Measuring Range 48 Measuring Range 150 Q Measuring Range 3000 Measuring Range 600 Hexade cimal The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for the resistance measuring ranges 48 Q 150 Q 300 and 600 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI for Resistance Measurement gt 56 4427 176 3835 gt 352 767 gt 705 5339 32767 Overflow 56 4427 48 0174 176 3835 150 0054 150 000 112 500 352 767 300 0109 300 000 225 000 Negative values physically impossible ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 705 5339 600 0217 600 000 450 000 32511 27649 27648 20736 0 6C00g 5100g Overrange Nominal range 8000H Underrun 8 41 Analog Modules M
268. rcuit for the internal electronics and the load circuit are gal vanically isolated from each other All 120 230 V AC electronics blocks and floating 24 V DC electronics blocks belong to this category e the voltage supply of the internal logic and the analog circuits are gal vanically isolated from each other analog electronics blocks belong to this category Note You can use floating electronics blocks regardless of whether the reference potential of the supply voltage for the internal logic circuits is grounded or not In non floating electronics blocks the internal logic circuits and the load cur rent circuit share a common reference potential M ground Non floating electronics blocks include non floating 24 V DC electronics blocks ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Conductor Cross The approved conductor cross sections for all voltage supply and signal lines sections are as follows Table 3 3 Approved Conductor Cross sections Line Conductor Ferrules Conductor Cross section w o ferrules max 2 5 mm min 0 08 mm for TB3 4 TB4M 8 and min 0 14 mm for 1 4 TB2 2 4 Protective earth PE to with ferrule max 2 5 mm terminal block for TB1 4 DC or TB2 4 DC only Connections Some terminal blocks are fitted with screw terminals while others have spring latch terminals see Figure 3 15 for
269. re important as regards the wiring of the ET 200B 32DI Wiring and ET 200B 32DI 0 2 ms The terminals for PE on the 4 tier terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB2 4 DC L5 and terminals 33 64 are interconnected as are M5 and terminals 65 96 e The two L5 terminals are also internally interconnected Fuse The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 2 5 A in the terminal blocks Nevertheless make sure that the current does not exceed the specifications in the technical data for the electronics block ET 200B Distributed Station 7 24 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates for 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO and 6ES7 131 0BL00 0BLO Bus protocol for 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO and 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO FREEZE capability for 6ES7 131 0BL10 0XBO and 6ES7 131 0BL00 0XBO Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD Diagnostics functions The technical data of electronics blocks ET 200B 32DI and ET 200B 32DI 0 2 ms is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Typ 4 8 W Approx 800 g 28 oz 235 x 130 x 60 mm 9 17 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SI NEC L2 DP Status of inputs Green RUN LED Red BF LED Green LEDs Supply voltage
270. reak for a reference temperature 0 C In the overrange any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 37 Analog Modules Measuring Range The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Type U Thermo ues for Type U thermocouples couples Table 8 23 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type U Ther mocouples Copper Copper Nickel to DIN 43710 Complement of Twos Units Thermal Tempera Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range m f in ture in mv 15141312 11109 8 76 54 gt 850 0001101010010 Overflow Overrange 600 010 599 010 300 010 100 010 Nominal range 1 01 0 0 01 0 1 0 0 100 010 150 01 0 199 01 0 200 010 201 010 Overrange 273 Overflow X Wire break for a reference temperature 0 C In the overrange any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited 200B Distributed Station 8 38 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 4 5 Analog Value Representation Operation with SIMATIC S7 Analog Value Rep If you operate the ET 200B 4 8AI with SIMATIC S7 the analog values are resentation SI represented in complements of twos MATIC S7 The table below shows the analog value representation of the ET 200B 4 8AI Table 8 24
271. requesting diagnostics data see the manual STEP 7 Stan dard and System Functions If you operate ET 200B as DP slave with DP masters from Siemens that do not belong to the SIMATIC S5 S7 M7 automation system or with other ven dor DP masters see the documentation on the DP master for information on how to request slave diagnostics The analog modules of ET 200B support the following alarms Diagnostics alarm Process alarm You can evaluate these alarms with an 57 7 DP master In the event of an alarm alarm OBs are automatically run in the CPU see the programming manual System Software for 87 300 87 400 Program Design Note If you want to evaluate diagnostics alarms and process alarms via the device related diagnostics with other than PROFIBUS DP masters you must bear the following in mind DP master should be able to store the diagnostics messages i e the diagnostics messages should be placed in a ring buffer in the DP master If the DP master cannot store diagnostics messages only the most re cently received diagnostics message will be available e n your application program you must regularly query the corresponding bits in the device related diagnostics With regard to the bus runtime for the PROFIBUS DP you must allow for the fact that the bits are queried at least once parallel to the bus runtime The structure of slave diagnostics for operation with S7 M7 DP masters STEP 7 or other PROFIBUS DP m
272. requirements of EU Directive 89 336 EC Hlectro magnetic Compatibility and the harmonized European standards EN stan dards cited therein In accordance with Article 10 of the above mentioned EU Directive the EU declarations of conformity are available for scrutiny by the authorities re sponsible by Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungstechnik AUT E 148 Postfach 1963 D 92209 Amberg ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 6 3 General Technical Specifications Area of Applica tion Compliance with Installation Guide lines Recycling and Dis posal 6 4 SIMATIC products designed for use an industrial environment With a special permit SIMATIC products can also be used in a residential environment residential office and trade environments small businesses You must obtain the special permit from the appropriate authority or testing agency In Germany these special permits are issued by the Bundesamt f r Post und Telekommunikation and its regional offices Area of Application Requirement for Interference Interference Emission Immunity EN 50081 2 1993 EN 50082 2 1995 Residential Special permit EN 50082 1 1992 SIMATIC products satisfy the requirements if you comply with the guidelines for installation and operation as laid down in the manuals The ET 200B distributed I O station is an environmentally compatible prod uct The following are so
273. ribed in Figure C 4 The defaults for these three bytes are 00g 60g for 4 8AI and 4AI e 00g20g for4AO 2 1 OBitNo Ojo Byte 7 Startbit monitoring Stopbit monitoring ON Watchdog base 0 10 ms Fail safe mode 1 1 ms 0 Other DP master 1 DP master in SIMATIC S7 M7 65 Bit No Byte8 0 0 0 0 0 0 Diagnostics alarm enable Process alarm enable 5432 OBitNo Byte 9010 1 o 0 Operation with S7 M7 DP master 1 Operation with IM 308 C 0 Analog value representation in SIMATIC S5 format 1 Analog value representation in SIMATIC S7 M7 format 1 Bit is always 1 00 Complement of twos 4 8Al 4AI 01 Amount with sign 4 8Al 4Al 10 Binary 4Al 11 Invalid entry Figure C 4 Parameters for Status 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Parameterization Telegram C 4 Parameters for Analog Input Modules Parameters for The next bytes bytes 10 to 35 contain the following parameters for 4 8Al and 4Al ET 200B 4 8AI and ET 200B A4AI Byte 10 07H Block length Byte 11 S7 constant Byte 12 04 Slot For bytes Byte 13 00H Data record number 15 16 Byte 14 02 Data record length Byte 15 Diagnostics enable Byte 16 Wire break moni gt See Figure C 6 tor enable Byte 17 13H Block length Byte 18 S7
274. rization incorrect wire break measur ing range overshot Either Module has not received a parameterization tele gram or telegram is incor rect Incorrect bus protocol Module has received in correct configuration data Module has received incorrect parameterization or configura tion telegram Check that the electronics block is correctly mounted on the terminal block Read the diagnostics buffer to identifv the error see Section 2 If there is no diagnostics in formation in the buffer check parameterization to ascertain whether the diag nostics alarm and corre sponding channel diagnos tics have been enabled Check the configuration in the DP master station number station type Check the configuration Check parameterization and configuration Flashes once red Lit red Lit green Lit green D 2 No signifi cance Module is powering up Baud rate matching in prog ress Check the PROFIBUS DP connection Check the DP master ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x D 2 Slave Diagnostics In this Section This section contains information on slave diagnostics of ET 200B in opera tion with IM 308 B Section Describes Page 2 1 General information on slave diagnostics operation with D 4 IM 308 B D 22 Structure of slave diagnostics D 23 Structure of device rela
275. rnally jump _ for channel group nel group Q3 0 to 7 ered but not con Q3 Output 1 58 5 Q3 0 to 7 internally jumpered nected to PE screw Q3 Output 2 internally jumpered E Q3 Output 3 60 Q3 Output 4 Q3 Output 5 Q3 Output 6 Q3 Output 7 L5 Voltage supply inter M5 Ground connection PE internally jump nal logic internal logic ered but not con L5 Voltage supply inter M5 Ground connection nected to PE screw nal logic internal logic 1 TB2 4 DC only in the TB4M DC tier 4 is available for additional ground connections see Section 7 2 7 Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 32DO The terminals for PE on the 4 tier terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB2 4 DC e Ifall actuators are connected by two wire cables to the TB2 DC TB4 DC or TB2 4 DC connect the ground of an actuator and the supply for the reference potential per group by means of a DIN 46231 cable cleat e 1 1 5 and M5 are not internally interconnected The two L5 terminals are internally interconnected ET 200B Distributed Station 7 42 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol SYNC capability Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB
276. ronics block on the terminal block 1 2 Press the electronics block onto the terminal block 2 3 Secure the electronics block by tightening the screws 3 Figure 3 8 Engaging the Electronics Block on the Terminal Block ET 200B Distributed Station 3 12 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Labeling the Elec tronics Block ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c A labeling strip is inserted in the electronics block Individual DIN A4 sheets consisting of several labeling strips can be ordered separately Please refer to Appendix F for order numbers Versions For electronics blocks with 16DI 16DO 8DI 8DO 8DI 8DO HWA 8RO 4 8AI 4AO 10 labeling strips on one DIN A4 sheet e For electronics blocks with 16DI AC 16DO AC 32DI 16DO 2A 32DO 16DI 16DO 24DI 8DO 16RO AC 8DI 8RO AC 7 large labeling strips and 9 small labeling strips on one DIN A4 sheet 3 13 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior 3 3 Dismantling the Terminal Blockandthe Electronics Block Dismantling Proceed according to the following steps from the Standard i 1 Remove the electronics block in the reverse sequence to that described in Sectional Rail Fi gure 3 8 Warning Avoid electrical destruction of the electronics block Always set the STOP RUN switch of the terminal block to the STOP posi tion before disengaging the electronics blo
277. rst mounting the shield connecting element on a standard sectional rail 35 15 0 35 x 7 5 mm to DIN EN 50022 or a smooth surface To secure the shield braiding install metal terminal elements on the shield connecting element You can order the shield connecting element and the terminal elements under the following numbers e Shield connecting element Order No 6ES7 193 0CD40 7XA0 Terminal elements set of two Single version Order No 6ES7 390 5BA00 0AA0 one shield cable per terminal element with a diameter of 3 to 8 mm to be clamped Double version Order No 6ES7 390 5AB00 0AA0 two shield cables per terminal element with a diameter of 2 to 6 mm to be clamped Note If you mount the 8 with shield connecting element on a standard sectional rail you must install the ET 200B horizontally ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 5 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Mounting on a To mount the terminal block on a standard sectional rail Standard Sectional Rail 1 Hang the terminal block on the standard sectional rail 1 and 2 Swing it back until the slide on the module snaps into place 2 Note The meanings of the coding switch settings are explained in Table 3 1 Figure 3 4 Hanging the Terminal Block on the Standard Sectional Rail and Setting the Coding Slide Switch 200B Distributed Station 3 6 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical
278. s 5 3 5 3 Slave Diagnostics 5 5 5 3 1 General Information on Slave Diagnostics Operation with IM 308 C 5 6 5 3 2 General Information on Slave Diagnostics Operation with S7 M7 DP Masters STEP 7 or Other PROFIBUS DP Masters 5 3 3 Structure of Slave Diagnostics 5 3 4 Structure of Station Status 1 5 3 5 Structure of the Master Station Number and the Manufacturer ID 5 3 6 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics Digital ET 200 5 3 7 Structure of ID related Diagnostics Analog ET 200B 5 3 8 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics Analog ET 200B ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4 812 6089 02c V Contents vi General Technical Specifications Digital Modules 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 8 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 2 6 7 2 7 7 2 8 7 2 9 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 7 3 5 7 3 6 7 3 7 7 3 8 7 3 9 7 3 10 7 3 11 7 3 12 7 3 13 7 3 14 Digital Modules Terminal Blocks Terminal Block TB1 DC 6ES7 193 0CA10 0XAO0 Terminal Block TB1 4 DC 6ES7 193 0 20 0 Terminal Block TB3 DC 6ES7 193 0CA30 0XA0 Terminal Block TB2 DC 6ES7
279. s bytes 10 to 35 contain the following parameters for 4 200 4 10 07 Block length Byte 11 S7 constant Byte 12 04H Slot For bytes Byte 13 00H Data record number 15 16 Byte 14 024 Data record length Byte 15 Diagnostics enable Byte 16 Reserved Figure C 9 Byte 17 13 Block length Byte 18 S7 constant Byte 19 04u Slot For bytes Byte 20 01u Data record number 22 to 35 Byte 21 OEH Data record length Byte 22 Parameters for to 35 analog value E output See Figure 10 Figure C 8 Parameters for Analog Output Module 4AO Channel In the tables on the next pages the parameters for ET 200B 4AO apply to channels Table C 4 shows the assignment of terminals to channels Table C 4 Assignment of Terminals to Channels Channel 0 Terminals 0 1 0 2 Channel 1 Terminals 1 1 1 2 Channel 2 Terminals 2 1 2 2 Channel 3 Terminals 3 1 3 2 200B Distributed Station C 10 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Parameterization Telegram Bytes 15 16 Figure C 9 shows the contents of bytes 15 and 16 You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to 1 N 0 Bit No Byte 15 0 0 0 0 Diagnostics enable channel 0 Diagnostics enable channel 1 Diagnostics enable channel 2 Diagnostics enable channel 3 N 0 Byte16 0100000100 Notrelevant Figure C 9 Bytes 15 and 16 for Anal
280. s a discussion of Supplementary Bits in the section deal ing with analog value representation these bits contain additional diagnos tics information The analog ET 200B modules contain the following information in the Header device related diagnostics byte 7 0 Bit No Byte6 10 0 VS v 2 Length of device related diagnostics incl byte 6 10 bytes Code for device related diagnostics Figure D 1 Structure of the Header Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x Device Related Device related diagnostics of the analog ET 200B modules comprises 9 by Diagnostics tes Byte 7 00g Reserved Byte 8 00g Reserved Byte 9 to 15 Diagnostics data see Tables D 4 to D 6 Figure D 2 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics for Analog ET 200B Bytes 7 to 15 Bytes 9 to 12 Table D 4 shows the structure and contents of bytes 9 to 12 Table D 4 Diagnostics Data Bytes 9 to 12 Diagnostics message waiting Wrong 200B station type 11 Module 0101 Analog module 0 Reserved 5 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 7 Reserved 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c D 9 Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x Possible Values The possible values for byte 9 are as foll
281. s and 4 wire measuring transducers require a separate voltage supply see Figures 8 21 and 8 22 Input Circuit There are two ways of measuring analog signals from current voltage sen sors e Floating ground measurement e Ground referenced measurement You set the input circuit for floating ground or ground referenced measure ment by means of the coding plugs on the TB8 one coding plug per chan nel Floating Ground In the case of floating ground measurement differential measurement each Measurement signal line has its own signal reference conductor Differential measurement is required in the following cases Ifthe sensors are connected to different potentials and If the different signal sources are physically apart Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage V cw of the differential inputs to analog ground Ma is 1 V The maximum permissible voltage difference between MA and PE must not exceed 75 V DC 60 V AC Avoid ground loops 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 53 Analog Modules Ground Referenced Mea surement On the Following Pages Rules 8 54 In the case of ground referenced measurement all signal reference conduc tors in the 8 are connected to a common reference point analog ground MA To avoid ground loops galvanically isolated and ungrounded signal sources thermocouples voltage sources are required Note Connect to
282. s information has been placed in a data block Note The module parameters of the FB IM308C and the error codes in the ERR parameter of the FB IM308C are described in detail in the manual ET 200 Distributed I O System Order No 6ES5 998 3ES 2 In this example the FB IM308C FB 192 is employed to request slave diag nostics of a slave having the station number 3 The diagnostics data will be placed in data block DB 10 as of data word DW O0 Basic structure of the STEP 5 listing e g in the OB 1 Explanation Invoke FB IM308C DP frame F800 DPAD KH F800 Number of the IM 308 C 0 station num IMST KY 0 3 ber of the slave 3 FCT KC SD SD Read slave diagnostics GCGR KM 00000000 00000000 irrelevant TYP KY 0 10 Memory area O0 block DB10 STAD 0 Number of the first data word DWO LENG KF 1 Bytes to be transferred 1 joker length Error word MW 134 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics Example Evaluating Diag nostics Diagnostics Alarm and Process Alarm Structure of Slave Diagnostics The slave diagnostics of a digital ET 200B module have been requested from the CPU and placed in a data block DB 10 starting at data word DW 0 You want to evaluate station status 1 and 2 In the STEP 5 program you program the following STL Explanation A DB 10 Invoke data block here DB 10 Load L DW O diagnostics word Station status 1 a
283. securing the cable conductors Figure 3 15 Connecting Cables to Spring Latch Terminals ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 23 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Pin Assignments In Chaptet 7 Range of Modules you will find the pin assignments of each electronics block The following table will help you Table 3 4 Pin Assignments of the Terminal Blocks Assignment of For Electronics Block See TBI DC TB1 4 DC and ET 200B 16DI Table 7 3 TB3 DC ET 200B 16DO Table 7 5 ET 200B 8DI 8DO Table 7 9 ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 67 10 ET 200B 8RO TB2 DC TB2 4 DC ET 200B 16DO 2A Table 7 6 TB4 DC and TBAM DC t 5055 sop Table 7 4 ET 200B 32DI 0 2ms ET 200B 32DO Table 7 7 ET 200B 16DI 16DO Table 7 12 ET 200B 24DI 8DO Tabl ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms TB6 AC ET 200B 16DI AC Table 7 14 ET 200B 16DO AC ET 200B 16RO AC Table 7 16 ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC Table 7 17 TB8 analog ET 200B 4 8AI ET 200B 4AI Tabl ET 200B 4AO Table 8 65 ET 200B Distributed Station 3 24 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Shielding for Ana log Value Proces sing Procedure for Con necting the Shield ing For analog value processing connect the cable shields of the signal lines di rectly at the 8 to the shield connecting element Order No 6ES7 193 0CD40 7X A0 Follow the steps listed below 1 Engage the 8 terminal block
284. stics digital ET 200B 5 3 7 Structure of ID related diagnostics analog ET200B 5 3 8 Structure of device related diagnostics analog ET 200B 5 18 Further Informa Section 5 3 3 describes the basic structure of slave diagnostics for digital and tion analog ET 200B modules Section 5 3 8 describe the contents of the individual diagnostics bytes 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 5 Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 1 Requesting Slave Diagnostics FM IM308C Example Request Diagnos tics with 08 STL JU 192 Name 08 ERR FW 134 5 6 Generallnformation on Slave Diagnostics Operation with IM 308 C To request slave diagnostics for an ET 200B station in operation with IM 308 C you must call the FB IM308C function block FB 192 with the function SD The FB IM308C places the slave diagnostics in the S5 data area of the CPU data block or bit memory address area opened when the FB IM308C was called FB IM308C handling conforms to general access to diagnostics data of the IM 308 C and is described in detail in the manual ET200 Distributed I O Sys tem Order No 6 55 998 3ES 2 The example below shows how to request slave diagnostics with the aid of the FB IM308C and place the information in a data block This is followed by an example illustrating how to evaluate slave diagnostics This second example assumes that the diagnostic
285. t and Sign Mea Digitized Measured Value sured Value in mA 20 mA 14 13 12 11 10 9 19 9902 19 9804 0 00976 0 0000 0 00976 19 9902 20 0000 Table 8 48 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 Measuring Range 20 mA Binary Mea Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range sured Value in mA 20 mA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 19 9902 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 19 9804 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 00976 0 Nomina 0 0000 o anas 0 00976 0 19 9902 0 20 0000 1 200B Distributed Station 8 68 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Table 8 49 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Measuring Range 0 20 mA Units Measured Digitized Measured Value X X OV Range Value in mA 0to20mA 1514131211109 8 76 5 43 2 4095 19 9951 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 4094 19 9902 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 0 0 0 0 Nomina 1 range 1 0 00488 0000000009000110 0 0 0 00000 0000000000000 0 041 Same representation for two s complement amount and sign and binary Table 8 50 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Measuring Range 4 20 mA Units Measured Digitized Measured Value Value in mA 4 to 20 mA 1514131211109 8 76 5 43 211 Same representation for two s complement amount and sign an
286. t is not a Siemens product If you are using a Siemens DP master you do not need a GSD file The device master data for Siemens DP masters is defined in the type file COM ET 200 specific format Degree of protection to DIN 40050 protection against touch with the fingers and ingress of foreign bodies having a diameter larger than 12mm When in possession of the token the master can send data to other stations and request data from other stations active stations DP masters include for example the CPU 315 2 DP and the IM 308 C ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Glossary Master interface module Master slave method N Non floating Parameterization master Process alarm PROFIBUS Module for distributed configuration The distributed I O connects to the PLC via the IM 308 C master interface module Bus access method in which only one station is the DP master and all other stations are DP slaves The reference potentials of control and load circuits are electrically con nected in the case of non floating I O modules Each DP slave has one parameterization master On startup the parameter ization master downloads the parameterization data to the DP slave The parameterization master has read and write access to the DP slave and can change the configuration of a DP slave A process alarm is triggered by 57 modules with interrupt capability in re sponse to certain even
287. tation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AO Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 10V DOCU BuU Decimal Hexa Range decimal ore 11 7589 11 7589 Overrange 10 0004 10 0004 10 0000 10 0000 Nominal range 10 0000 10 0004 Underrange 11 7593 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 87 Analog Modules Current Output The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized output signals Ranges for the value ranges 20 mA 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Table 8 64 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200 4 Output Ranges 20 mA 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Output Output Output Units Range Range 20 Range Range mA 0t020mA 4to20mA Decimal Hexade cimal 0 Overflow 23 518 Overrange 20 0007 20 0007 20 000 0 Nominal range 20 000 Underrange 23 519 0 Underrun 200B Distributed Station 8 88 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 6 0 Block Diagram Terminal Assignment and Technical Data Block Diagram Simplified representation of potential for the ET 200 4 and 8 ET 200B 4AO Analog TB8 PROFIBUS DP 24V 5V Logic r18
288. ted diagnostics analog ET 200B 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c D 3 Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x D 2 1 General Information on Slave Diagnostics Operation with IM 308 B Requesting Slave Diagnostics are loaded word by word in the STEP5 application program and Diagnostics transferred to the diagnostics word The load and transfer operations always refer in the following to the default diagnostics address 252 In the case of page addressing the diagnostics word is on the basic page Before requesting diagnostics in the case of page addressing you must first switch to the basic page Basic Structure of the STEP 5 Listing for Diagnostics STL Explanation L KB basic page number Page selection T PY 255 basic page number nx16 0 1 L KY station number code Load diagnostics station number T PW 252 3 99 code Table D 2 andp 3 and transfer to the diagnostics word diag nostics word here PW 252 L PW 252 Evaluate diagnostics word hex code gt L KH hex code no error Sectio D 2 2 F Error BEC JC FBx Evaluate error in FBx More Information Handling a request for slave diagnostics corresponds to general access to diagnostics data for the IM 308 B and is described in detail in the manual ET 200 Distributed I O System Order No 6 55 998 3ES 1 The following is an example of how to request slave diagnostics with the STEPS application program an
289. ted to L3 connected to M1 M2 nected to PE screw QO Output 2 19 35 M3 QO Output 3 20 QO Output 4 21 QO Output 5 22 QO Output 6 23 QO Output 7 24 10 Input 25 10 Input 26 10 Input 27 10 Input 28 10 Input 29 10 Input 30 Input 31 Ground sensor volt age internally jump ered connected to M1 M2 M3 32 11 Voltage supply L1 Ground supply M1 for channel group Q0 for channel group Q0 0 to 7 zfs L3 Voltage supply Ground connection internal logic and sen internal logic and sen sor voltage 24 V sor voltage PE internally jump ered but not con nected to PE screw cele EEEPEPEEEEERE Ground connection internal logic and sen sor voltage L3 Voltage supply internal logic and sen sor voltage 24 V 1 TBI 4 DC only ET 200B Distributed Station 7 52 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 8DI 8DO The terminals for PE on the 4 terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB1 4 DC e 1 and L3 are not internally interconnected L3 and terminals 25 32 are interconnected as are M2 M3 and terminals 33 48 The two L3 terminals are also interconnected Fuse The 24 V sensor supply is protected by fuse F1 1 6 A in the terminal blocks
290. tems Table 1 1 ET 200B Range of Applications Operating with Configurable with SIMATIC S5 IM 308 B master interface release COM 200 V4 x 5 and higher version 4 0 and higher digital modules version 4 1 and higher analog modules IM 308 C master interface release COM ET 200 Windows and higher version 1 0 and higher SIMATIC S7 M7 S7 M7 DP master with integral STEP 7 PROFIBUS DP interface version 2 0 and higher digital modules version 3 0 and higher analog modules Theanalog modules of ET200B can be operated as S7 slaves in conjunction with SIMATIC 57 M7 and STEP 7 V3 0 and higher This means that all the functions of the central 57 I O modules are also at your disposal for the ET 200B analog modules The next sections of this chapter contain an overview of the components of ET 200B ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c System Overview 1 2 1 Terminal Block Definition The terminal block incorporates the permanent wiring Characteristics The terminal block has the following characteristics The supply voltage for the electronics block logic can be switched on off except for the TB6 AC terminal block The terminal block be mounted both on standard sectional rails and on smooth surfaces so direct wall mounting is possible The PROFIBUS DP bus is interfaced via a SINEC L2 bus connector e Station numbers between 00 and 99 can be set with th
291. the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate 181500 kbaud 7 61 Digital Modules 7 3 9 Electronics Block ET 200B 16DI 16DO 6ES7 133 OBLOO 0XBO Characteristics The ET 200B 16DI 16DO has the following characteristics e 16 inputs non floating e 16 outputs floating in groups of 8 Input voltage 24 V DC Input delay 3 ms Load voltage 24 V DC Possible terminal blocks TB2 DC TB2 4 DC TB4 DC TB4M DC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 22 for the precise dimensions ing 200B 1601 1600 00 0624 5 7 01 DC24V 54 10 DC24V 11 DC24V 1221527 1012 35 45 6 7 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 21234552 8 1 2 J s ls 7 e m bs ja hs he 1 ho 121 2 los 27 lza st 82 5 81 96 5 C speprpspspopipo Tw TEE Pn o 2 so js e s 56 n bie H T 2 Figur
292. the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type N thermocouples couples Table 8 21 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type N Ther mocouples Nickel Chrome Silicium Nickel Silicium to IEC 548 1 Complement of Twos Units Thermal e Tempera Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range m f in ture in mv 15141312 11109 8 76 54 gt 1550 11000001 110 Overflow Overrange 1301 01 0 1300 010 1000 010 500 010 100 010 Nominal range 1 01 0 0 01 0 1 0 0 100 0 0 250 010 260 010 270 010 271 010 Overrange 273 Overflow X Wire break E for a reference temperature 0 8 36 In the overrange any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Measuring Range The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Type T Thermo ues for Type T thermocouples couples Table 8 22 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type T Thermo couples Copper Copper Nickel to IEC 548 Part 1 Complement of Twos Units Thermale Tempera m f in ture in mv 00010000 1 Overflow Overrange Nominal range 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 010 UOS SO CO uo Uu x Overrange Overflow Wire b
293. the differential inputs to analog ground is Ucm 1V 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules 8 5 2 Configuration Options Type File The information in this section applies to the type file SI8019BE 200 The type file contains the possible configurations The configuration you choose depends on the wiring of the module Configuration Table 8 38 shows the possible configurations of the ET 200B 4AI with COM ET 200 Windows or STEP 7 Table 8 38 lists only the slots for configuring the Input areas slots 4 to 7 Slots 1 to 4 have the default value 004 Table 8 38 Possible Configurations for the Input Areas of ET 200B 4AI Config Terminals used Length Meaning uration Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 in words 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 0 3 1 A start address is assigned for the en tire module addresses for 4 words are reserved module addressing A separate start address can be as signed for each channel single channel addressing 1 Length of user data X Connection of measuring lines Diagnostics Diagnostics messages and diagnostics data slave diagnostics are returned only for the configured channels ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 61 Analog Modules 8 5 3 Setting the Operating Mode Setting the Operat You set the operating mode of the ET 200B 4AI electronics block ing Mode by means of the
294. the distributed inputs and outputs The Components The distributed input output system consists of active stations DP masters of ET 200 and passive stations DP slaves interconnected by the PROFIBUS DP field bus DP master 55 115 135 1550 57 300 7 300 57 400 7 400 55 950 l Fr 8 al IE T STEP 7 2 PROFIBUS DP ee 09 i m DP slaves ET 200B ET 200C ET 200M S5 95U Field devices Figure 1 1 Typical PROFIBUS DP Configuration with SIMATIC S5 S7 M7 SINEC L2 DP SINEC L2 DP is the PROFIBUS DP from Siemens PROFIBUS DP 12 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c System Overview 1 2 What is the ET 200B Definition Range of Modules Application Components The ET 200B B stands for block I O belongs to the ET 200 distributed I O system with the PROFIBUS DP field bus ET 200B is a DP slave having IP 20 protection The ET 200B distributed I O station incorporates an integral port for connec tion to the PROFIBUS DP bus and digital or analog inpu
295. thermocouple Fe CuNi Type L 1 Fe Cu Ni J 2 NiCrNi Type K 3 Cu CuNi Type U 6 Cu Cu Ni Type T 7 Reference temperature 0 C 00 20 C 20 ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 9 Analog Modules On the Following Pages Rules 8 10 The following pages contain a connection example for every connection pos sibility and measuring principle Please note the following rules Please note the following rules when connecting measured value sensors to the ET 200B 4 8AT The permissible potential difference at the differential input x 1 lt gt x 2 or x 3 lt gt x 4 x 0 to 3 must not exceed 1 V The maximum permissible common mode voltage V cy between the differential inputs x 1 lt gt x 2 x 3 lt gt x 4 x 0 to 3 and analog ground Mais 1 V The maximum permissible isolation voltage between analog ground Ma and PE Ay or between the reference potential of the supply voltage M is 75 V DC 60 V AC You must short circuit the connection terminals of unused voltage inputs and connect them to Ma If the coding plug is in the C position the connection to MA is not re quired already jumpered internally If you connect only one voltage sensor 2 wire connection to one chan nel you must also short circuit the remaining free differential input of the channel group and connect it to MA If the coding plug is in the C position the connection to MA is not re quired alread
296. tics byte 12 Device related diagnostics byte 13 EPROM or ADC DAC error channel type 7 Device related diagnostics byte 14 Device related diagnostics byte 15 always 08g number of channels More Information You will find the information you need on slave diagnostics for analog Analog ET 200B ET 200B modules in the following sections you will find in Section General information on slave diagnostics operation with IM 308 B Structure of station status 1 to 3 Structure of the master station number and manufacturer ID Structure of device related diagnostics analog ET 200B ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c D 7 Configuring with COM ET 200 V4 x D 2 3 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics Analog ET 200B Introduction Diagnostics Alarm Process Alarm Device Related Diagnostics Header Byte 6 D 8 The structure of device related diagnostics for configuring the analog mod with COM ET 200 V4 x is described below In essence this section is comparable with Sectio of this manual No ID related diagnostics are displayed in operation with COM ET 200 V4 x Analog modules configured with COM ET 200 V4 x do not support alarms diagnostics alarm process alarm The device related diagnostics for an analog ET 200B shows you the error reported by the ET 200B The header indicates the length of device related diagnostics Note Chapter 8 contain
297. tion EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 4 1 Configuration and Parameterization 4 1 Configuration Options Options You can configure and parameterize the ET 200B modules described in this manual as DP slaves e with COM ET 200 version 4 x or higher version 4 0 or higher digital modules version 4 1 or higher analog modules e with COM ET 200 Windows version 1 0 or higher e with STEP 7 version x 0 or higher version 2 0 or higher digital modules version 3 0 or higher analog modules directly by means of configuration and parameterization telegrams for DP masters from Siemens that do not belong to the SIMATIC 55 57 7 automation system and other vendor DP masters S7 Slave Theanalog modules of ET200B can be operated as S7 slaves in conjunction with SIMATIC 57 M7 and STEP 7 V3 0 and higher This means that all the functions of the central S7 I O modules are also at your disposal for the ET 200B analog modules ET 200B Distributed Station 4 2 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Configuration and Parameterization 4 2 Requirements for Configuration Type File GSD File COM ET 200 V4 x COM ET 200 Windows and STEP 7 require a type file for each ET 200B module DP slave The type file is a record of all the properties of the module concerned You do not need a type file to operate ET 200B analog modules as S7 slaves Before you start working with the software check that the type file of the ET 200B module is instal
298. tion Suppr number loaicit selection ogic Tuse Conn Out S 5 ST 3 PROFI Supply 5120405 X sti 4L1 V Le BUS DP 1N 2N 3N N 4N N conductor 9 Ee E 9 9 N Screw for grounding Digital 120 230V PE see 34 outputs AC supply Figure 7 53 Block Diagram ET 200B 16DO AC 6ES7 132 0HF00 0XBO and TB6 AC 200B Distributed Station 7 80 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 16DO AC For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB6 AC by way of example Table 7 15 Pin Assignment of Terminal Block TB6 AC for ET 200B 16DO AC 6ES7 132 0HF00 0XBO Terminal numbering TB6 AC 12 3115 6 7 8 9101 12 13 14415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25126 27 28 23 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46147 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 6411 LI 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73174 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89190 91 92 93 94 95 96 N Voltage supply 1L1 for channel Voltage supply 1N for channel 00 0 to 3 66 QO 0 to 3 a 37 not used 38 not used not used 42 Voltage supply 21 1 for channel Heus J OT 00 Output 00 Output 00 Output 00 Output Q1 Output Voltage supply for channel Q1 Output 50 QI Oto 3 Q1 Output 19 51 Q1 Output 3
299. to 1080 hPa Operating conditions Shock tested to IEC 68 2 27 of shock Strength of shock IEC 1131 2 Semi sinusoidal 15 g peak value 11 ms duration SO lt 0 5 ppm rel humidity lt 60 no condensation Direction of shock SM Eripe hd the 3 e HS lt 0 1 ppm rel humidity perp lt 60 no condensation Drop and topple to IEC 68 2 31 Tested with Height of fall 100 mm 3 90 in 1 Vibrations and shocks permanently reaching the speci fied values as well as bumps must be prevented by ade ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c quate measures 6 1 General Technical Specifications nity Static electricity to IEC 801 2 Test voltage Electromagnetic fields to IEC 801 3 Fast transient burst to 801 4 Class III Digital input output module for V 24 for V gt 24 V Analog input output module Communications inter face Electromagnetic compatibility EM C noise immu Discharge to all parts that are accessible to the opera tor during normal opera tion 8 kV air discharge 4 kV contact discharge relative humidity 30 to 95 Field strength 10 V m 2kV 2kV 2kV 2kV IEC VDE safety information Degree of protection to IEC 529 Type Class Insulation rating Between electrically independent circuits and circuits connected to a central grounding point Between all circui
300. tputs is 0 5 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 29 Digital Modules Table 7 5 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 16DO 6ES7 132 0BH01 0XBO continued Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 41 L3 Voltage supply inter M3 Ground connection PE internally jump nal logic internal logic ered but not connected to PE screw L3 Voltage supply inter M3 Ground connection nal logic internal logic 1 TB1 4 DC only Important Note on The following notes are important as regards the wiring of the Wiring ET 200B 16DO The terminals for PE on the 4 tier terminal block are not connected to the PE connection of terminal block TB1 4 DC e 11 L2 and L3 are not interconnected 2 M3 and terminals 33 48 are internally interconnected The two L3 terminals are internally interconnected 200B Distributed Station 7 30 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol SYNC capability Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 16DO is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Yes Max 5 W Approx 600 g 21 oz 160 x 130 x 6
301. trical Installatior Changing the Cod The procedure for changing the setting of a coding plug is as follows ing Plug Setting 1 Pull the coding plug above the channel group from its socket in the TB8 1 Tip It is easiest to reset the coding plugs before installing the electronics block 2 Turn the coding plug to the appropriate position 2 and reinsert the cod ing plug in its socket 3 Correct setting The pointer A beside the letter A B C or D must point toward the electronics block Figure 3 7 Changing the Setting of the Coding Plug 200B Distributed Station 3 10 EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Mechanical and Electrical Installatior Terminal Block The fuse F1 in the terminal block protects against Fuses n e short circuit in the sensor supply reversed polarity of the voltage supply to the internal logic voltage spikes in the voltage supply to the internal logic If the fuse trips the module s internal logic is deenergized Changing the Fuse Proceed as follows when changing the fuse 1 Switch the STOP RUN switch to the STOP position Pull the electronics block off the terminal block Pry the fuse out of its base using a screwdriver Insert the new fuse Reinstall the electronics block on the terminal block Switch the RUN STOP switch to RUN VE 09 ha Note The TB6 AC terminal block has no STOP RUN switch Make sure that the external po
302. tronics block and terminal block TB1 4 DC Station m number Suppr logic selection STOP RUN Connection switch PROFIBUS DP N o Li L34 M I 6 o e o Voltage 9 Pa 2 CF e e Screw for groundin 24 V see Sec 3 4 Outputs Inputs supply Figure 7 40 Block Diagram ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BH01 0XBO and TB1 4 DC ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 51 Digital Modules Pin Assignment The table below shows the pin assignment of the terminal blocks for ET 200B 8DI 8DO For the sake of clarity the table also shows the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB1 4 DC by way of example Table 7 9 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0BH01 0XBO Terminal numbering TB1 4 DC Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 4 24 V sensor voltage Ground outputs in PE internally jump internally jumpered ternally jumpered ered but not con connec
303. ts and central grounding point standard sec tional rail Test voltage for a nominal voltage Vinput of the cir cuits AC DC Vinput 0 to 50 V Vinput 50 to 125 V Vinput 125 to 250 V Radio interference sup pression Limit class IP 20 I to IEC 536 to DIN VDE 0160 05 1988 and IEC 1131 2 to DIN VDE 0160 05 1988 and 1131 2 to DIN VDE 0160 and TEC 1131 2 500 V DC 1250 V AC 1500 V AC to VDE 0871 A ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c General Technical Specifications UL CSA Certifica tion FM Certification CE certification 200B is certified as follows UL Recognition Mark Underwriters Laboratories UL to Standard UL 508 Report 116536 CSA Certification Mark Canadian Standard Association CSA to Standard C 22 2 No 142 Report LR 48323 The AC 120 230 V digital modules of ET 200B are FM certified as follows FM Certification to Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611 Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Warning Risk of injury and damage to property In hazardous locations injury and damage to property can occur if you dis connect connections while an ET 200 is in operation In hazardous locations always deenergize the ET 200 before disconnecting connections Warning WARNING DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS LOCATION IS KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS Our products satisfy the
304. ts non floating e 8 outputs non floating Input voltage 24 V DC Input delay 3 ms e Load voltage 24 V DC Possible terminal blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC or TB3 DC See Figure 7 18 for the precise dimensions RUN BF DIA Lit SIEMENS ET 200 1 800 Q 0 4 0 4 1 5 1 5 2 6 2 3 7 3 5 O D024V 5A L 1 00241 0 45 2 34 55 6 7 0 40 2 3 4 5 6 7 jut r ds Je 5 s GD 8 ds tio In hz dhs dha hs he T LJ EJ C3 EJ Y Y Y Y Y Y 3 Mt 4 7 4 7 1 33 34 35 6 37 38 3 0 25 peo 27 ps 29 30 22 L3 133 0BH01 0XB0 e Figure 7 38 Front Elevation 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0 01 0 0 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 7 49 Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified d
305. ts in the process The process alarm is reported to the central CPU The appropriate organization block is then processed in accor dance with the priority of the interrupt In SIMATIC 57 7 An operating range is defined for example by parame terizing an upper and lower limit value If the process signal e g tempera ture of an analog input module exists this range the module triggers a pro cess alarm if alarms are enabled The CPU interrupts processing of the application program or lower priority classes and processes the process alarm block OB 40 In SIMATIC 55 The process alarm is mapped within device related diagnos tics Errors such as upper limit value overshoot etc are detected by regularly querying the diagnostics bits of device related diagnostics PROcess Fleld BUS German process and field bus standard defined by the PROFIBUS standard EN 50170 It specifies the functional electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit serial field bus system PROFIBUS is a bus system which networks PROFIBUS compatible automa tion systems and field devices on the cell and field levels PROFIBUS ver sions support the protocols DP Dezentrale Peripherie distributed I O FMS Fieldbus Message Specification or TF 2 Technological Functions ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Glossary 5 Glossary PROFIBUS DP Protective ground conductor R Reference poten tial Response monitor
306. ts outputs The range of modules for the ET 200B includes 24 V DC digital modules e 120 230 V AC digital modules e Analog modules Thanks to its compact and flat design the ET 200B distributed I O station is primarily suited to applications where space is a priority The ET 200B distributed I O station can be mounted either on a standard sec tional rail or directly onto the wall Vertical and horizontal installation are both possible The ET 200B consists of 2 parts the terminal block and the electronics block The terminal block TB incorporates the permanent wiring and does not con tain any function related electrical components The electronics block is at tached to the terminal block The electronics block EB contains the logic circuits The terminal block and the electronics block have matching mechanical cod ing elements to prevent destruction of the electronics block Electronics block Terminal block EN ET 200B lo0000000000000000000 Figure 1 2 Components of ET 200 ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 1 3 System Overview Compatible with S7 Slave The Next Sections AII ET 200B modules can be addressed with the PROFIBUS DP bus proto col ET 200B can be operated with the following sys
307. ured val Ni 100 Resistance ues for resistance sensors Ni 100 Sensors Table 8 16 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI for Ni 100 Resistance Sensors Complement of Twos Units Resistance Tempera Digitized Measured Value inQ C 512151211109 8 7 6 54 3 JOKA 0001 001001 1 Overflow 000100 001 Overrange Nominal range oo oc oc cc c c c ojo c Oc oO Oo ooo oc o o QI e GG Io eo coo cre Overrange XX XXXXXXXXXXXJ 0 Wire break In the overrange any rise in the characteristic curve is retained when the linearized nominal range is exited ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 31 Analog Modules Measuring Range Type E Thermo The table below shows the assignments of analog to digitized measured val ues for Type E thermocouples couples Table 8 17 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4 8AI with Linearization Type E Ther mocouples Nickel Chrome Copper Nickel to IEC 548 Part 1 Complement of Twos Units Thermal e Tempera Digitized Measured Value X F OV Range m f in ture in mv 15141312 11109 8 76 54 gt 1200 0010010110000 Overflow Overrange 1001 01 0 1000 010 800 010 400 010 100 010 Nominal range 1 01 0 0 01 0 1 010 100 010 200 010 260 010 270 010 271 010 Overrange 273 Overflow X Wire break for a reference temperature 0 C 2 the overrange a
308. urement x3x1 2 4 A 8 58 The 2 wire connection of current sensors ground referenced measurement is shown below V V V ACI TB8 gt 1 gt Y V V K lo3lo4 13 14 ISIN K 10 1102 1 12 Shield gt Stil A 24V AL MA Max 75 V DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC a eut Mexternal Figure 8 20 Two Wire Connection of Current Sensors Ground Referenced Measurement ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Connecting 2 Wire and 4 Wire Mea suring Transduc ers 2 Wire Measuring Transducers A B x 3x 1 2 4 M Ty The 2 wire and 4 wire measuring transducers receive a separate supply volt age 2 wire measuring transducer converts the incoming measured variable into a current 4 wire measuring transducers can be used to measure current and voltage The figure below shows how to connect the 2 wire measuring transducer as a current sensor V V V
309. urement 7 Analog ground MA L Voltage supply internal logic M Voltage supply internal logic M Voltage supply internal logic 0 1 2 3 Note Certain additional settings must be made for the input circuit by means of the coding plugs of the TB8 The settings of the coding plugs are illustrated in Fi gures 8 17 to 8 22 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 73 Analog Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol Galvanic isolation to the SINEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD The technical data of the ET 200B 4AI electronics block are listed in the table below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes Typically 1 8 W Approx 550 g 19 25 oz 160 x 130 x 60 Diagnostics functions alarms Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics Alarms Limit value alarm Diagnostics alarm Supply voltage L Rated value Permissible range e Value fort lt 0 5 s Current consumption from L Logic Tn operation with the IM 308 B the maximum possible baud rate is 1500 kbaud 8 74 Green RUN LED Red BF LED Red DIA LED parame terizable Yes parameterizable channels 0 and 2 Yes parameterizable Supply voltage for inputs and internal logic 24 V DC 18 5 302 V 35V 70 mA Number of inputs
310. ut value Table 8 42 Description of the Bits 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Bit Meaning Signal Status Meaning of the Signal Status OV Overflow bit Overrange SI Sign sign sign X Irrelevant 1 Inthe event of overflow at one measuring point the overflow bits of the other channels remain unaffected this means the values of the other channels are correct and can be evaluated ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 65 Analog Modules Voltage Measuring The tables below show the assignments of analog to digitized measured val Ranges ues for the measuring ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5 V 10 V The ET 200B 4AI module 6ES7 134 0HF01 0XBO does not have an over range Table 8 43 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Measur ing Ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5 V 10 V Complement of Twos Units Measured Value in V Digitized Measured Value Range 1 25V 2 5V a 876543 111 1 2047 00 1 1 1 1 1 Il 2046 f 9 9902 00 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Nomina 0 1 range 1 2047 2048 y Table 8 44 Representation of Digitized Measured Values of the ET 200B 4AI 6 57 134 0 01 0 0 Measur ing Ranges 1 25 V 2 5 V 5 V 10 V Amount and Sign Units Measured Value in V Digitized Measured Value X Range
311. w Figure 7 1 is a dimensional drawing of the TB1 DC screw type terminal ing 3 tier 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2418 4 5 16 A AAA Y 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 23 30 31 32 Lt L24L3 L34 FRA AAR AAA n e 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44145 46 47 481 M1 M2 M3 M3 o F IESLESDODOUCODODUOGUUDUDUUL Es N H 160 25 5 25 5 19 2 121 7 j N STEMENS E z eA 57 193 0CR10 0XRO DLL o SSeS E Ser IZ 3 FL T6 di o DO og cc E gyro 2 r a i 9 2 202202202222020202 ds 8
312. wer supply is switched off before removing the electronics block and changing the fuse Approved Fuses Install only the fuses listed in Table 3 2 The fuses can be ordered in packs of ten Table 3 2 Approved Fuses for Terminal Blocks Terminal Fuse Order No Block pack of 10 TB6 AC Miniature fuse TR5 T 1 0 250 V AC 6ES7 193 0DC00 0XA0 TB1 DC Miniature fuse TR5 T 1 6 250 V 6ES7 193 0DA00 0XAO0 TB1 4 DC Miniature fuse TR5 T 1 6 250 V TB3 DC Miniature fuse TR5 T 1 6 250 V TB8 analog Miniature fuse TR5 T 1 6 250 V TB2 DC Miniature fuse TR5 T 2 5 250 V 6ES7 193 0DB00 0XA0 TB2 4 DC Miniature fuse TR5 T 2 5 250 V TB4 DC Miniature fuse TR5 T 2 5 250 V TB4M DC Miniature fuse TR5 T 2 5 250 V ET 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 3 11 Mechanical and Electrical Installatior 3 2 Installing the Electronics Block Engaging the Elec After coding the terminal block via the coding slide switch you can engage tronics Block on the electronics block on the terminal block the Terminal Block Warning Avoid electrical destruction of the electronics block Always set the STOP RUN switch of the terminal block to the 5 posi tion before engaging the electronics block on the terminal block The TB6 DC terminal block has no STOP RUN switch Always switch off the external power supply before attempting to engage an electronics block 120 230 V AC onto the TB6 DC 1 Engage the elect
313. witches 2 wire proximity switches acc to IEC 1131 type 1 Possible terminal block TB6 AC Dimensional Draw See Figure 7 22 for the precise dimensions Ing RUN BF SIEMENS ET 200 16D1 AC Oo L4 Oo 14 Jaen M d as Oy as Da Oe Oe Oe O13 Li 03 07 4 10 4C120 230V IbACI20 230V 45 04123 439567 041 853 4567 5 1 le da d4 CM lis lia lis he liz lie lio leo M 4 90 98 31 lae os oe as oe 10137 39 eLi 4e 44 Nes eer o 3 15 5 41158 60 63 64 N Figure 7 50 Front Elevation ET 200B 16DI AC 6ES7 131 0 00 0 0 7 74 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Block Diagram Simplified diagram of the potential for the ET 200B 16DI AC and TB6 AC ET 200B 16DI AC Galvanic
314. ws the terminal numbering of the terminal blocks taking the TB1 4 DC by way of example Table 7 5 Pin Assignment of Terminal Blocks TB1 DC TB1 4 DC and TB3 DC for ET 200B 16DO 6 57 132 0 01 0 0 Terminal numbering TB1 4 DC Terminal tier 1 Terminal tier 2 Terminal tier 3 Terminal tier 4 00 Output 0 not used internally Ground internally PE internally jump f z jumpered jumpered connected ered but not con to M2 M3 nected to PE screw 00 Output 2 00 Output 3 00 Output 4 00 Output 5 00 Output 6 00 Output 7 Q1 Output 0 Q1 Output 1 Q1 Output 2 Q1 Output 3 2 2 8 11 Voltage supply L1 for channel group Q0 0 to 7 12 Voltage supply L2 Ground supply M1 for PE internally jump channel group Q0 ered but not con 0 to 7 nected to PE screw Ground supply M2 for channel group Q1 0 to 7 for channel group Q1 0 to 7 lt lt TR BR A BR WI WI 51 al al we SG we ala maximum load for these outputs is 2 the maximum load for all other ou
315. y contacts ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Digital Modules Technical Data Technical specifications Baud rates Bus protocol Galvanic isolation to SI NEC L2 DP bus Power losses Weight EB and TB Dimensions EB and TB WxHxD The technical data of electronics block ET 200B 8DI 8RO AC is listed in the tables below 9 6 19 2 93 75 187 5 500 1500 3000 6000 12000 kbaud PROFIBUS DP Yes 500 V DC to logic 1500 V AC to connection terminals 13 W 811 g 29 oz 235 x 130 x 60 mm 9 17 x 5 07 x 2 34 in Diagnostics functions Voltage monitoring Bus monitoring SINEC L2 DP Group diagnostics for short circuit load voltage failure Load voltage monitoring Status of outputs Green LED Red LED No No Green LEDs Supply voltage for internal logic Supply voltage L1 Rated value Permissible range e Frequency e Current consumption from L1 120 230 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 47 to 63 Hz Typ 165 mA noperation with the IM 308 B the maximum baud rate is 1500 kbaud ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Inputs Number of inputs Galvanic isolation e n groups of Input voltage Rated value For 0 signal For 1 signal Input current for 1 sig nal e at 120 60 Hz e at 230 V 50 Hz Type of input acc to 1131 Delay of inputs Connection of 2 wire
316. y jumpered internally If you connect a compensating box you must short circuit terminals and For this purpose set the coding plug to the position Note Please note the explanation of shielding of analog lines in Sections 3 1 and 3 5 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Analog Modules Floating Ground Measurement x 3x 1 O 2 4 The figure below illustrates the connection of thermocouples of the same type with one compensating box for the entire module floating ground measurement V V V K4 0 3 0 4 1 3 14 MALH L K flo 1 o0 2 1 1 1 2 2 gt Shield es zr 24V Comp box Thermal link 1 Ucm S 1V Max 75 DC Max 75 V DC 60 V AC 60 V AC at PE Ma Mexternal Figure 8 6 Connection of Thermocouples with one Compensating Box Floating Ground Measurement Note The maximum permissible common mode voltage Vcw lt 1V must not be exceeded at any of the differential inputs with reference to MA ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 8 11
317. yte 1 Table 5 5 Structure of Station Status 2 Byte 1 DP slave must be reparameterized A diagnostics message is waiting The DP slave cannot resume operation until the error has been rectified static diagnostics mes sage Bitis always 1 if DP slave having this station number exists Response monitoring is activated for this slave DP slave has received a FREEZE control command 0 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c DP slave has received a SYNC control command Bit is always 0 5 11 Status and Error Diagnostics Station Status 3 Byte 2 5 12 Table 5 5 Structure of Station Status 2 Byte 1 continued Bit Meaning 1 DP slave is deactivated i e slave has been removed from current processing 1 Bit is not updated unless an extra diagnostics message changes Station status 3 is reserved and is not relevant as regards diagnostics of the DP slave Its value is always 00 ET 200B Distributed Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 5 Structure of the Master Station Number and the Manufacturer ID Introduction The Master station number diagnostics byte contains the station number of the DP master which parameterized the ET 200B The Manufacturer ID diagnostics byte describes the type of the ET 200B Master Station The master station number consists of one byte see Figures 5 1 and 5 2 Number B
318. yte 3 Table 5 6 Structure of the Master Station Number Byte 3 OW O O 0to7 Station number of the DP master which parameterized the DP slave and which has read and write access to the DP slave Manufacturer ID The manufacturer ID consists of two bytes see Figures 5 1 and 5 2 Bytes 4 5 Table 5 7 Structure of the Manufacturer ID Bytes 4 5 Byte 4 Byte5 Manufacturer ID for 00g OBH ET 200B 8DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0 01 0 0 00g 200B 32DO 6ES7 132 0BL01 0XBO 00g OEH ET 200B 24DI 8DO 0 2ms 6ES7 133 11 0 00g OFy ET 200B 24DI 8DO 6ES7 133 0 01 0 0 00g 10 ET 200B 8DI 8DO HWA 6 7 133 0BH10 0X BO 80H lAg ET 200B 4 8AI 6ES7 134 0KH01 0XBO 200B Distributed I O Station EWA 4NEB 812 6089 02c 5 1 Status and Error Diagnostics 5 3 6 Structure of Device Related Diagnostics Digital 200B Introduction Header Byte 6 Device Related Diagnostics Byte 7 5 14 The device related diagnostics for digital ET 200B modules indicate whether inputs or outputs are defective The header indicates the length of the device related diagnostics see Figure 5 1 bytes 6 and 7 Note Device related diagnostics requires an ET 200B station with diagnostics ca pability ET 200B stations which do not have diagnostics capability have the value 07g in the header and the remaining bytes are reserved Digital ET 200B modules

ET 200B manual - DCE FEL ČVUT v Praze

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents